Full text of "Transactions of the Philological Society"

See other formats

Google 



This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 

to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 

publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 
We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 

at |http: //books .google .com/I 







INDEX 



TO THE 



PROCEEDINGS AND TRANSACTIONS 



OF THB 



PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY, 



1842-1879. 



• • 






COMPILED BY 




S. J. HEURTAGE, B.A., 




AmO YBKIETED BY 



F. T. ELWORTHT. 



PUBLISHED FOE THE SOCIETY BY 

TRtJBNEE & CO., 
57 AND 59, LUDGATE HILL, LONDON, E.C. 

AND 

KARL I. TRUBNER, STRASBURG. 

1884. 



• • « • • 

• • » •• - 



« 



r • 






* * 
* • 
• • • 



• r 



HERTFORD: 

PRINTED BT STEPHEN AUSTIN AND SONS. 



159106 



FOREWORDS. 



An Index to the Philological Society's Proceedings and 

Transactiona had been often aakt for, but no one would 
come forward to make it, till Mr. Sidney J. Herrtage kindly 
did 80 in the year 1880. With the help of a clerk, to 
whom the Society paid a small sum, Mr. Herrtage finisht 
the Index, and saw part of it in proof. But his after work 
as (practically) Editor of Cassell's Encydopcedic Dictionary 
proved so engrossing, that he was unable to revise and 
verify the Society's Index; and so it stood still for a 
while. 

Mr. F. T. Elworthy, of the Society's Council, the well- 
known authority on the Dialect of West Somerset, then 
generously took up the work, and with the help of his 
wife and daughters, has carried it thru, verifying every 
reference, and taking no end of trouble with it. 

To Mr. Herrtage, as well as to Mr. Elworthy and his 
family, the thanks of every Member of the Society are 
due, for thus making readily available to students the 
material in the Society's 38 years' work. 

25th Sept. 1884. 

F. J. F. 



INPEX 



PB*>rEEi'iy'-^ -O": TLzi^^^^m .::- 



I'HILOLOGICAl 



)"^ +'"V 



>_• ■ v-'l 



I3fX»EX ■:■? ^TTZl'llS .Lyz ?7I;3..Trr 




^»-T.-.»_ : 



I ^-., 






Aizrj— >32T rrnz. 



«c 



rr l^z^'- «..£ 






^~ 



IRITS! 






r: :.'**ii ..— '. 



TC. ■■ -: -:r-^- 



n. V. 






L CI *t^^' 



if. 



. ;'»- r. ,. . 
310. 

*x. :i>- .-■ 



Tc-^ 



i. iV. 



*W: ■■■ 



'■'.'< 



.*ru-.--i..'_:- 1:-- .' i:. 

i"u.!."- •=;■ *.-:". :_ ,-., —.-■ ^^ __ 

k— it-— . '-* - 1 a^^ -«A«, -•".- .1. .^^ 

-■ .-•■ f" r.'i»f:i-: ". :i. . liii ;. 

•■•...' ' '■ ' ".»»■ --li.i**:!' I- ».:'.. 

j;: ...... r • .•.._- J-. li 

^ ..... t .•_ ^5 •■ "^ . ■ « '." _^ . ■_» 

!• - ■ V ^ - ■ - 

■» .•■:..■ ..•:■_ .• -"j*'*;.! r. -. • 

•<■ !.- •■■c- ' _'-.:- i* \ii- 

-!«.<£....-. T-i. ^ ..... i • ,1- -_■ ..7 

'.«.••... ." . .-....■<. .h/c. . .' .-.J- i;ji 

. . . >w' -.y.. / J.*$.' '4 '4 

-... » "*■-€ -i -J 

■ # • <- •• . .'..1 ,, _' 

'..^i.il.. . .f — :!•- . f.^: •..M.S. i 









:• 



• • • • «' 

• • • 



.*• 



• • a • 






« 



- • 



• ' " « 

•• • • 

A • • • 

• • • • • 

e • • • 



• * 



INDEX 



TO THB 



PROCEEDmOS AND TRAIfSACTIONS 



OF THE 



PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY, 

1842-1879. 

I. 

INDEX OF ArTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



[The Society's Proceedings, vols, i-vi., run from 1842 to 1863. The vols, are 
referred to by years ; for instance, vol. vi. p. 156, is entered as '62-8, 166. 

The Transactions begin in 1854, and its vols, are quoted by their years, thus, 
'77-9, 678.] 



A, the Anglo-Saxon prefix, a corrup- 
tion of -on, '64, 64. 

a, Norman and Early English, '68-9, 
370. 

Af the mark of the Italic Imperfect, 
found in Keltic, '69, 31. 

A, the broad, English, explained, '67, 
24. 

A, Final, in Latin nouns, did not 
originally mark gender, '66, 300«. 

A, gutturals apt to vanish before in 
Greek, '62-8, 16. 

A privativum, on, by Professor Key, 
'66, 62. 

A privativum and A intensivum, iden- 
tical in origin, '66, 64. 

* a dining y* ^en dinant; ' explanation of 
phrases, '60-1, 181, 182. 

«, as a suffix of Latin Verbs, '66, 302, etc. 

€ and 0, closely related in 

Greek, '62-8, 299. 

the symbol of past time. 



'62-3, 154 ; cf. 301. 
ab, as a suffix of Latin substantives, '66, 

310. 
Abel, Dr. Carl, on the Coptic Language, 

'66, 51-61. 
Abbott, Dr., on English Metre, '78-4, 

624, 635. 
Abbreviation, the laws of, in language, 

'62-3, 169. 
Ablative, absolute, Umbrian,'62-8, 1 84. 
Abnormal and Abnormous, '77-9, 677. 



Abroad and aboard, '77-9, 678. 

Abraham. Rev. C. J. ; short Vocabu- 
laries of theMallicolo andErromango 
Languages, '62-8, 69. 

Abyss, origin and history of, '77-9, 
576. 

Abyssinia : — Vocabularies of lan- 
guages spoken in Abyssinia and its 
neighbourhood, '44-6, 97 ; the 
Hhamara, Falasha and Agdwi cog- 
nate tongues, 90 ; the races which 
speak these dialects probably the 
original inhabitants of Abyssinia, 91 ; 
traditions respecting their early his- 
tory, 92 ; the Gafat language almost 
extinct, 96 ; appears to nave had no 
connexion with the Amharic or with 
the earlier languages, ib. ; the lan- 
guages of G6nga, KslfPa, "Woratta, 
Womista and Yangaroo, 93 ; lan- 
guages cognate with those of Kdffa, 
Woratta and "Wolaista, together with 
a corrupt form of Christianity, pre- 
vail to the west of KafPa, 96 ; the 
language of the Shdnkala or negroes 
of Agaumider, 94 ; of the Gallas of 
Gudera, 96 ; languages of Tigre and 
Harrargie, 96. 

Accadian language, '73-4, 375. 

character of, '77-8-9, 123 

vowels in, 127 ; accent in, 127 
diphthongs in, 132; consonants in 
138 ; phonetic decay in, 126, 139 

1 



' '•: •••^/: iiccixrro pitocr.tiNp 'iiiifii,.iui^yoG. soc. 1842-79. 



Accadian language [eontinuedl : — 
its connexion with other dialects, 
142 ; Phonology, hy Prof. A. H. 
Sayce, 123 ; how ascertained by the 
Assyrian language, 126. 

Accent, '62-3, 67 ; in Greek, 74 sqq. ; 
78 ; not to be disregarded, 84. 

Latin, Prof. Key's views of, 

'68-9, 316, etc. 

and vowel intensification. 



'73-4, 280 ; Italian, 134 ; laws of, 
38 ; physical constituents of, 113; 
relation to metre, 35, 625, 636 ; 
SaAscrit, 163 ; tonic, in Modem 
French, 260 ; in Virgil's hexame- 
ters, 36 ; and quantity in Scotch, 
96-7*. 

in Accadian language. 



'77-9, 127. 

of Eomance words, '68-9, 



379. 

Accented letters, objections against use 
of, in print, *67, 1 Ap. 3. 

syllables, the distinctions of, 

'66, 131. 

Accents, omission of, in atonies no 
guide to the pronunciation, '67, 63. 

Accentuation, Greek ; Prof. Key on,* 
'66, 119-146. 

Accusative case, plural, in the British 
languages, '68-9, 265-6. 

absent in Caucasian lan- 
guages, '77-9, 610, 618. 

Achaemenids, pedigree of the, '62-8, 20. 

ady prefixed to Latin verbs often repre- 
sents the Greek ava, '66, 36-37 ; de- 
rivation of, 96. 

-adf of Latin prepositions, '68-9, 309. 

Adams, Br. E., on the names of ants, 
earwigs, and beetles, '68, 93. 

■ on the vernacular names 

of insects — the lady-bird, '69, 84- 
7 ; the cock-chafer, 87-90 ; the 
rose-chafer, 90, 91 ; the stag-beetle, 
91, 92 ; the glow-worm, 92-4, the 
red devil, 94 ; the bum-cow, 95 ; 
the straddle bob, etc., 96. 

on the names of spiders, '69, 



216-227; attercop, etc., 217; cob- 
(web), 218; spinner, 219; araine, 
220 ; (gossamer, 221) ; staggering 
bob, 222 ; shepherd, 223 ; twinge, 
tainct, 225 ; wolf and hunter, ete., 
225. 

on the names of the wood- 



louse, '60-1, 8 ; on the names of 
caterpillars, snails and slugs, 89. 

remarks on the probability 



of Gothic settlements in Britain pre- 
vious to 460 ▲.D., '60-2, 13-24. 



Addresses, Annual. See President, 
'77-9. 

Adjectives in West Somerset dialect, 
'77-9, 157 ; comparison of, 161 ; in 
spoken Swedish, 506. 

Adverbs in West Somerset dialect, 
'77-9, 223. 

•ae, Latin diminutival ending = o<^ in 
Greek, '62-8, 29. 

ae, etty Boman and English, '68-9, 386. 

^schylus, his use of Ikoti, '44-6, 65, 
and tc^TOTt, 66, contrary to Homeric 
precedent ; correction suggested, 
Sept. c. Th. V. 200, 207 ; the passage 
Prom. V. V. 671 considered, 218-266. 

his truthful account of the 

Battle of Salamis, '62-3, 101, etc. 

Affixes in Hungarian, — verbal, '69, 
99-116; nominal, 117, 124. 

not j»re -positions, modify the 

radical, '69, 123. 

Africa, South, languages of, '73-4, 186. 

Western and Southern, on 

the languages of, by Dr. VVilhelm 
Bleek, '66, 40-50. 

African languages, the pronouns of the 
first and second persons in, '69, 
36-8, etc. 

■ : peculiarities of the Galla 
verb and pronoun, '46-8, 125 ; the 
verb has only one regular conjuga- 
tion, ib. ; is inflected by means of 
suffixes, ib. ; its terminations com- 
pared with those of the Arabic 
Sreterite, 126 ; subordinate forms 
eveloped from the Galla verb, ib. ; 
the inflexions are suffixed, while in 
the Arabic, Amharic, etc., they are 
prefixed, ib. ; Galla pronouns com- 
pared with the pronouns of certain 
Shemitic and Airican dialects, 127 ; 
a remote connexion between these 
languages and the Galla probable, 
128 ; on the Tumali language, 239 ; 
the Tumali identical with the Takeli 
and Deier, ib. ; derivative verbs 
generally formed bv adding certain 
suffixes, 240 ; new forms of the verb 
arising from certain prefixes, ib. ; 
only one conjugation, 241 ; four 
tenses, the present, the future, and 
two prseterites, ib. ; personal pro- 
nouns sometimes addea to the nomi- 
native by way of pleonasm, ib. ; 
Eersons of the verb distinguished 
y prefixes, ib. ; paradigms of the 
verbs en * to be,' almek * to collect,' 
ajo ' to drink,' 242 ; the nega- 
tive verb, 244 ; the negative verb 
answering to en ' to be, anjek ^ to 



I. IKSEX OF AXJTH0B8 AND SUBJECTS. 



a 



African languages [continued] : — 
know,' 245 ; substantives primitive 
and derivative, 246 ; formation of 
the plural, ib.; the relation of the 
genitive case expressed by the 
possessive pronoun, ib. ; adjectives 
not inflect^, ib. ; their initial assimi- 
lated to that of their substantives, 
247 ; formation of adverbs, ib. ; of 
substantives from adjectives, ib. ; 
the numerals, ib. ; pronouns, ib. ; the 
possessive pronouns always affixed, 
248 ; demonstrative pronouns, 249 ; 
pronouns indefinite and interrogative, 
ib. ; adverbs of time and place, ib. ; 
conjunctions and prepositions, 250'; 
interjections, 251. 

' : vocabularies collected by 

Krapf and Hales, '48-60, 11 ; Caffre 
dialects spoken continuously from 
the Cape to the Equator, 14 ; seems 
to admit of the subdivisions, the 
Congo-Makua and the Ca&rarian, 
ib. ; Koler's vocabulary of the Bonny 
language, 73 ; the Bonny language 
not a dialect of the Ibo language, as 
hitherto supposed, ib. ; formation of 
the plural of the pronouns personal 
in Tumali, 79 ; on the elementary 
sounds of the Tumali language, 138 ; 
books written in the Vei language 
with native characters, 136 ; the 
Mendi language closely allied to the 
Vei, ib. ; the Cameroons language 
with the Bimbia, 136 ; notice of the 
Fazoglo language, 139 ; vocabulary 
of the Avekvom (Quaqua) dialect, 
183; the Avekvom clearly one of 
the Ashanti languages, ib. 

Philology, on certain recent 



additions to, by Dr. Latham, '66, 
85-95, 185-206 ; on certain classes 
in, '68, 107. 

list of 294 languages, dialects 



or subdialects, in which Clarke and 
Koelle give the names for man, 
woman, father, etc., '66, 200-202 ; 
list of 388 languages, etc., in which 
they give the African for the nume- 
rals, 202-5. 

'Offhf a suffix to Latin verbs, '64, 216 ; 
'56, 302, etc. 

offh or ach (Keltic) ' little,' its repre- 
sentatives in Latin, '66, 295-354 ; 
Prof. Key's supplemental paper on, 
'69, 273-284. 

Agathyrsi, the, were Turks, '66, 
109-112. 

Agent, separate nominative case in 
Kamilaroi when the noun is the 



agent of some verb ; mute = opossum, 
mutedu = opossum as an agent, '66, 74. 
Ahrens, H. L., Ph.D. : on feminines 
in 09 and »r, and on the word yvpri ; 
with comments by Prof. Key, '62-8, 

155-177. 

' (F.) mistaken in considering 

the initial y (which in certain Hesy- 
chian glosses takes the place of tne 
digamma) as a corruption, '44-6, 
234 ; his criticism on the forms f €|, 
Fe^'^KovrUf etc., 236. 

at, pronunciation of, in Early French, 
'77-9, 37*. 

aij ay^ ei, ia, ie, Norman and English, 
'68-9, 387, 395. 

Aiguille, derivation of, '67, 24. 

-OK, '62-8, 119. 

Alaceri, and some related Greek words, 
by Prof. Key, '62-8, 26. 

Alani, the, VT^re the same as Geloni, 
and Herodotus' s 'EAAtji^cs "ZicvBat 
were Scythian Greeks, '64, 112, 
113. 

Alcaic stanza, the structure of the, 
'64, 15. 

Alexander, AUit. Bomance, cited, 
'62-8, 45», 91, 105, 106, 112. 

Buik of, cited, '62-8, 100, 

101, 103, 106. 

Algonquin group of languages, addi- 
tions to : the Belthuck, '66, 58 ; 
Shyenne, 61 ; Blackfoot, ib. ; Arra- 
pabo, 62 ; Fitzburgh Sound, 64. 

Alliteration, the necessary condition 
for a verse, in Icelandic, '66, 201. 

system in South African 

languages, '68, 109 sq. 

Alone^ loney and lonelyy Mr. H. Wedg- 
wood, on, '77-9, viii. 

Alphabet, the Devanagari or Sanscrit, 
*60-62, 83-88. 

of the Malagasy language, 

'77-9, 287. 

early, '78-4, 59 ; physical 



scheme, 319; Eoman, 841; standard 

(Moffatt), 189. 
Alphabetics, General, *78-4, 479. 
Alphabets of Greece and Bome, partly 

derived from the Egyptian, 'M)-62, 

1-6. 
altf German for * old,' the derivation 

of, '64, 94. 
Altero and its analogues, by Prof. Key, 

'62-3, 1. 
America, Dr. Latham on the languages 

of Northern, Western, and Central, 

'66, 57-115. 
See North American dia- 
lects, verb, etc. 



INDEX TO FROC. AND TRANS. PHIL0L06. SOa 1842-79. 



America, Central, on some additions 
to the ethnographical philology of it, 
with remarks on the so-called Astek 
Conquest of Mexico, *54, 151-6. 

American languages. See Ethnography 
of America. 

See South America. 

amor=iamo in Plautus, '67, 406. 

afi/pi and vepiy distinction between the 
meanings of, '52-8, 55. 

Amphictyonic League, and the meaning 
of the term .^phictyones, *52-3, 
61-8. 

An- prefix in Gaelic, '65, 67. 

Arty in Umbrian=: aya,'62-3, 192. 

-ay of Modem Greek neuters, e.ff, 
hyofioPf discussed, '67, 8o. 

Ay, final, avoided in Greek, '62-8, 303. 

aMUf as prefixed to verbs, its representa- 
tives in some European languages, 
'54, 29-72 ; the thirteen senses in 
which it is used in Greek, 31-5 ; its 
representatives (4) in Latin, 35, etc., 
64 ; in the Keltic languages, 41-3 ; 
in the Teutonic languages, 40-60, 
68 ; table of some, 69 ; its roots, 95. 

ayuy re, -er (Germ.) identical in origin, 
'66, 38. 

Analytical and synthetical languages, 
on the alleged distinction between, 
'62-8, 121-4. 

Anci^n Riwle, gnunmatical forms 
found in, '65, 150. 

referred to, '62-8, 35, 36, 39, 

41,96sqq., 109. 

Andaman Islands, language of, '77-9, 

87. 

anCf history of in Scotch, '78-4, 55*, 
180*. 

Ange, Angel, on the origin and primi- 
tive meaning of the word, '62-8, 
41-9. 

Angles, the, and the Anglian division 
of the Anglo-Saxon speech, '66, 
264-260; in Lancashire, 256-268, 
270-276. 

Anglo-Cymric score, by Mr. A. J. 
Ellis, '^77-9, 316. 

Anglo-Saxon Gentile nouns, how de- 
clined, '42-4, 103. 

idioms, the origin of certain, 

'60-2, 71. 

and Early English Syntax, 



on a curious Tmesis sometimes met 
with in, '60-2, 97-101. 

language, peculiar use of the 



patronymical termination ing, '48-60, 
1 : it nas the force of a genitive 
suffix, JE-Selwulfing land = ^thel- 
wulf 8 land, 2 ; is sometimes affixed 



to a woman's name — Cyneburging 
tun =the town of the Princess Cyne- 
burg, ib. ; this idiom unknown to 
the other Teutonic languages, 10 ; 
suggestion that these derivatives in 
ing may be adjectives corresponding 
to the German form Pariser, Bres- 
lauer, etc., 85 ; both forms indepen- 
dent of gender, case, or number, ib. ; 
the Russian patronymics originaUy 
adjectives, 85. 

Anglo-Saxon Conquerors of England, of 
what tribes they were, and whence 
they came, '55, 245-251. 

names of places in Lan- 
cashire, '55, 251-60, 262 ; dialect 
words UL Lancashire, 265-73. 

representatives of the prefix 



cvo, '54, 52, 55, 60. 

often useful m study of 



Hebrew roots, '58, 67. 

and Keltic languages, on the 



connexion between, *67, 39-92 ; list 
of related words in, 63-75. 

adverbs in -/y, -lice, '62-8, 



45n. 1. 



40. 



109. 

conjugations, '62-8, 216. 

suffix 'laCy '62-8, 34 sqq., 

various words, '62-8, 36 sqq. , 

and Scotch Vowels '78-4, 

142*. 

Annam, language and dialects of, 
'77-9, 85. 

Ants, earwigs, and beetles, on the 
names of, by Br. E. Adams, '68, 93. 

Aorists in Ka are earlier than those in 
an, and not, as Bopp supposes, later, 
'62-8, 37-9. 

.a^rr Latin diminutival ending -ae, 
'62-8, 29. 

Appa language, '68, 119 sq. 

Apprehendere, Fr. apprehendre, mean- 
ing of, '64, 51. 

afmd—apu in Plautus, '67, 404. 

Aquitania formerly inhabited by a 
Gaelic people, *66, 173, etc. 

Arabic : Pronunciation of the Arabic 
ghain, '46-8, 112 ; what letters are 
its representatives in other languages, 
ib. ; Arabic pronouns compared with 
the Galla, 127. 

Aration, meaning of, '69, 28. 

Are, Norse origin of, '60-1, 63. 

Archaic and provincial English words 
compared with Dutch and Friesic, 
by M. de Haan Hettema, '68, 143. 

■ forms foisted on Virgil by 

Ribbeck, '67, 211. 



I. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



Aristophanes quoted {a><f>€i\riff as), '62-8, 
291, 299. 

• his use of the Homeric word 

vpodeKvfivos, '44-6, 59. 

Aristotle, on his use of fiovas and 
apiOfios, '59, 13. 

hpidfxos, on the meaning of the word, 
hy Prof. De Morgan, '69, 8-14. 

Armenian, Report on, 1876-7, by Prof. 
Hiibschmann, '77-9, 64. 

Literature, '77-9, 66. 

Grammars and Dictionaries, 

'77-9, 68. 

Arnold,* review of his lecture on trans- 
lating Homer, '62-3, 73, 76. 

Arracan, language of, '77-9, 73. 

Arsis in the Greek Senarius probably 
the same thing as our English accent, 
42-4, 129. 

Arthur and Merlin, Romance, quoted, 
'62-8, 102. 

Article, nature and history of the, 
'60-2, 9-12; the demonstrative, is 
part of the noun in Sanscrit, Latin 
and Russian, 12; definite, in Nor- 
thumbrian, -62-8, 234 ; post-positive 
in Swedish, 236. 

Articles in spoken Swedish, '77-9, 
605. 

Articulation, difficulties in, '78-4, 320. 

Ash's English Dictionary, notice of, 
'69, 266. 

Asia, on the most ancient ethnographical 
state of "Western Asia historically 
known, by Dr. Lottner, *68, 137. 

Asia Minor,* languages of, '68, 137sq. 

Asmi, probably an old form of Sanskr. 
Istpers. pronoun, '62-8, 219. 

Aspirate consonant, an initial, often 
weakened to mere spiritus, '68, 16. 

' often replaces digamma, 

'62-8, 23 ; or aF, 23. 

initial, lost, '62-8, 27, 28. 



Assimilation of vowels, '62-8, 133 sqq., 

217. 

in Latin, '66, 349, etc. 

Assyrian inscriptions, '78-4, 372. 

studies in, '78-4, 374. 

and Accadian languages, 

'77-9, 126. 
-ate, Dr. Murray on English participles 

and -verbs in, '77-9, 680. 
Astek, meaning of the word, '64, 

156. 
Atam language, '68, 118. 
Athabaskan group of vowels, '66, 

65-70. 
Atkinson, Rev. J. C. , on the dialect of 

Cleveland, '67, 326 ; glossary of the 

Lonsdale dialect, edited by. 



Atna group of languages, '66, 71. 

-oTo not TOTo, '62-8, 10. 

Attie of a house, the derivation of, 

'64, 96. 
att, Norman and English, '68-9, 398. 
-aw, diphthong in Old English, '77-9, 

662, xiv. 
Aufy German prefix, examination of 

verbs compounded with, '67, 96. 
AuFRECHT, Prof. T., Greek 'Etymo- 
logies i^ripos, X^7«, yjidvSf ycvvos, 

|u«), '67, 18. 
Latin Etymologies, '68, 13 ; 

on two passages of the Iguvian 

tables, 17. 

some Latin and Greek Ety- 



mologies, dulcis, yXavKos, yXvKOSf 
iPoKvBevKTtSf '69, 14-16 ; on the 
original form of fto, 16 ; on the 
derivation of pollex, 17. 

on the derivation of «ow«, 



'66, 116-18; of otium, 143-44; on 
the terminations tia, tio, 144-46. 

on the different forms of 



5at«, '67, 126-8. 

English Etymologies, '66, 1. 

on Sanscrit, '78-4, 222. 

on Etruscan, '78-4, 361. 



Augment in Greek and Sanscrit a 
distinct element, '42-4, 265 ; theories 
of Buttman, Bopp and Pott, 266 ; 
a (with) used in Welsh and some- 
times in Irish as the sign of the 
preterite, 267 ; Irish do (to), and in 
ancient times no (then) and do no 
(then) employed for the same pur- 
pose, ib. ; Insh ro, answering to the 
Welsh rhy, so used, ib. ; in the older 
dialects of the German tho and ther 
were joined to the past tense, 268 ; 
addition of a preposition makes the 
Slavish '* imperfective " verb " per- 
fective," ib. ; system of verbal per- 
formatives in the Coptic, South- 
Indian and Polynesian languages, 
269 ; the Gothic prefix ge, 271 ; 
Greek and Sanscrit augment is pro- 
bably the Welsh a, ib. 

Aurelius Ambrosius the same person as 
the Anglo-Saxon Natanleod, '42-4, 
11. 

Australia, on the Kamilaroi language 
of, by Mr. W. Ridley, '66, 72-84. 

Auxiliary verbs, reason of the use of, 
'62-8, 123-4. 

Aves, oacines and aliteSy '68, 19». 

Ayenbite of Inwyt, '62-3, 39. Edited 
by Dr. Morris. 

-a|», verbs in their origin explained, 
'67, 296. 




TRANS. PHILOLOG. SOC. 1842-79. 



^ 



B, initial = (>, '63-8, 32; =8, 27; 

origin of ila form. '50-2, 3 ; irnd AT, 

frequently inUrchanged in Eastern 

languages, '68, 77. 

Babylonian epic, '73-*, 373. 

Bailey's English Lietionary, notiee of, 

'fiS, iSi. 
Baion aad Bati langnnges (ol Sontli 
Africa), Tocabulanes of, '68, 186; 
affinitive, 188-90. 
Bakeli langijigo, diwlenaioos in, '08, 

1)0. 
lal. the Greet root, and its deriTativea, 

'64, 203. 
-bam of Latin imperfect, '68-3, 153. 
Banerjea quoted, '6S-3, 1159q. 
BiBHAU, T. F., on Metrical Timo, or 
the Rhythm of Verse, And^nt and 
Modern, '60-1, 46. 
Bnmes, Tim, quoted, '6S-3, 106, «. 1, 

108, H. I. 
Bartiug, King of Bwtria, '62-3, 21, 

or Gomates the Magian, 

'S2-S, 15, 22, 2e. 

Basque language, '73-4, 212. 

Basques not the aborigines of Spain, 

or PhcGnidans, 'U, IflO : probablv 

of the name tribe as the Cantii, 183. 

Batraehomyomaahia, passage in Bau- 

meister'seditionemeiided, '60-1, 103. 

Batta language, rocabulaiy of, 'SB, 

ISl; affinities of, I9S-S. 
Se, an abstract. Dot a eimple Terh, 
'GO-3, 63 : derived from eating. 54. 
^cfl^TIKB, rtSr^Ko, etc., not derived 
from Hclitiom TootB ^^m, Srair, etc., 
'54, 301. 
Bede, his authority as to the eujy 
Etate of Britain qaestinned. 'B7, 79. 
Beetles, anta, aod earwig, on the 
uamea of, bv Dr. E. Adama, '68, 
93: 'BB, 81-96. 
Behiitun, the Kock Inscriptions of, 

'B2-S, 13. 
Beee, T., on the langoageB and dialects 
of Abyssinia and the countries to the 
south, '44-6, 89. 
Belgu>, the district iahabitod and lan- 
guage spoken hy the, '66, 166,160-2. 

eitent of their distribution 

in Gatd, '60-2, 15 ; in Britain. 22 ; 
their origin Gothic, 16. 
BeU's Visible Speech, Hr. EUis an, 
'67, 1 An. 3. 

— Visiblfl Speech, [73-4, 463. 

definitions, objections to, 

•73-4, 317. 
Bbhisch, Dr., on the coDJectural affi- 
nity of certain Hehrew and English 
words, '4S-60, 122. 



Bentham, Mtraaliimal coined by, 'B8, 

Bentley'e doctrine of greater licence in 
the first foot of an Iambic or Tro- 
chaio line, '6T, 406, 414. 

Berber Uuguage : a sistor family of 
the Semitic, ^60-1, 112. 

: consonant* nearly identical 

with those of the Arabic. '42-4, 136, 
two ronaonants rarely if ever come 
together in the same word except 
as finals, 137 ; consonants never 
doubled, 138 ; Towel system, (ft. ; 
the roots tnd their inSeiioiiB, ih. ; 
tetters servile and non -senile, robust 
and weak, ib, ; constitution of sylla- 
bles, 1 39 ; roots generally biliterol, 
i*. ; stmctore of verbs, ih. ; four 
nncompounded tenses, 140 ; a verbal 
form answering to the " syncopated 
Bubjnnctive " of De Saey, ib. ; deri- 
vative verbs answering to the Niphal, 
Hiphil, etc., of the Hebrew, ib.; 
participle ending in s» or on', 141 ; 
pronouns and personal endings of 
the verb, ib. ; pronouns both pre- 
fixed and Euffiied to the verbal root. 
142 ; relatives, ib. ; ( or M the 
feminine ending, ih. ; sometimes a 
prefix, ib. ; geaitival relation, how 
expressed, 143 ; words apparently 
Shemitic more Hebrew than Arabic, 
ib. ; numerala unlike those of the 
Shemitic langn^ea, 114. 

Bible, on its phioses ' three score years 
and ten,' and ' God save the King,' 
and the non-occurrenee of ' ila ' in 
tihe first authorized version of 1611. 
'Ba-3, 7-11. 

-bitis, -bulum, in Latin compared with 
-Hi,, -Mlum, '67, 11. 

Bindseil, his notice of Prof. Willis, 
'68-3, I31n. 

Bl, initial, oft«i interchanged with Ot, 
'68,7. 

BUKB. Dr., onWoolwa and Mosquibi 
Vocabularies, '73-4, 360. 

Blaeesley, Uev. J, W.. attempt at an 
explanation of some difficulties in the 
currently received account of the 
Battle of Marathon, '64, 1-10. 

an attempt at an outiine of 

the Early Medo-rersian hiatorj', 
founded on the Bock- Inscriptions of 
Behistun Inken in combination with 
the accounts of Herodotus and 
Ctesias, '62-3, 13-20. 

on the position and luetics 

of the contending fleets in the Battle 
of Salamis, '62-3, 101-16. 



I. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



Blebk, Dr., on ** Grimm's Law," in 
S. Africa, '73-4, 186. 



on the languaffes of "Western 
and Southern Africa, °65, 40-50. 

3loch, Dr. Moritz, Ms statement on 
the increase of Hungarian words, 
'65, 286-311. 

Bloimt's Glossographia, 1666, notice 
of, '59, 261. 

Blow, words representing the sound of 
a, '58, 10 sqq. 

'ho of Latin future, '62-3, 153. 

BoECK, M. von, on Quichua, '77-9, 
439. 

Boethius : in the printed editions of 
his works appears a translation of 
the first four books of Euclid, fol- 
lowed by an appendix, generally 
known as the Demonstratio, '48-50, 
163 ; the latter chiefly contains frag- 
ments from Varro, Seneca, and the 
Agrimensors, ib. ; the MSS. differ 

. both from each other, and from the 
printed editions, ib. ; Niebuhr de- 
nies the genuineness of the Demon- 
stratio, 165 ; Blume denies the 
genuineness both of the Demonstratio 
and of the Euclid, ib. ; negative 
arguments in favour of the genuine- 
ness of the Euclid, ib. ; arguments 
against it, 166; the opinion that 
Pope Gerbert compiled the Demon- 
stratio examined, 168 ; Blume's 
theory that the work was compiled 
by some person on this side oi the 
Alps, who had been in communica- 
tion with Gerbert, untenable, 169; 
additional arguments against Blume's 
theory, 269. 

Bonaparte, Prince L. L., on Basque, 
'73-4, 212. 

Northumbrian version of 

Solomon's Song, '62-8, 233. 

Bonapartean specimens of Provincial 
English, strictures on, '67, 2 Ap. 
2 Pt. p. 6. 

Booth's English Dictionary, notice of, 
'59, 268. 

list of Reduplicated words in 

English, notice of, '65, Appendix 
3. 

Bopp's Sanscrit grammar, 42-4, 26 ; 
his views as to the personal endings 
of the Sanscrit verb, 29 ; his theory 
of the Greek augment, 266. 

his theory identifying the 

case endings with pronouns or pro- 
nominal roots, '44-6, 166 ; his views 
as to the nature of the Greek aug- 
ment in some measure countenance 



by the verbal prefix of the Lappish, 

184. 
Bopp, his mistake in taking the 

ancient Slavonic instead of the 

modem, '60-2, 26. 
his view of the origin of the 

Greek Aorists in ica disputed, '62-3, 

37. 

his classification of languages 



disputed, '52-3, 118-26. 

his classification of languages 



questioned, '64, 170 ; his theory of 
tnree necessary consonants in Hebrew 
roots, 176. 

his derivation of hanfa (one- 



handed) disputed, '59, 140. 

- quoted, '62-3, 2 sq. 16, 127w. ; 



examined, 130 sqq. ; pronominal 
roots, 143 sqq. ; case enaings, 144 ; 
particles, 149; augment, 160; con- 
jugation, 153 ; prothesis, 155 ; 
epentbesis, 156 ; paragoge, 158 ; 
metathesis, 158. 

obituary of, '67, 306 ; list 



of his writings, 312. 

pronominal roots objected to, 



'68-9, 295-7. 

view of the formation of 



Latin passives in r controverted, '66, 

293. 
Borneo, language of, '77-9, 101. 
Bomu, the languages of, '55, 197. 
** Bow-wow " theory of the origin of 

language. Prof, fcey on the, '67, 

375. 
J5r, initial, often interchanged with Or, 

'58, 7. 
Bbach, G., fallow, derivation of, 

'67, 124. 
Bbandketh, Mr. E. L., on Non- Aryan 

languages of India, '77-9, II. 
Breast, the names for, resemble those 

for mother, '52-3, 204. 
Breton intermediate between the Kymric 

and Gaelic, '55, 173. 
grammatical forms of nume- 
rals and verbs, omitted, in the Gram- 

matica Celtica, examples of, '67, 33. 
(Middle-), Irregular verbs. 



list of, '67, 114. 

words hitherto unnoticed, 



list of some, '67, 29. 

language, '78-4, 166. 

publications, '78-4, 381. 

representatives of the prefix 



aya, '64, 42. 
$piapoi, on its meaning in Homer, 

'60-1, 276. 
Britain, Gothic settlements in, before 

450 A.D., '60-2, 13, 22. 



INDEX TO I 



SD TRANS. PEilLOLOO. SOC. 1S42-79. 



British! alpbnbet, '80-1, Z36. 
Brittanj', colonization of, from Bribiin, 

legenilan', '66, 109. 
Bbocx, l^. Edmund, on the gram- 

Duilical fonoi of Southern EogHsh 

(about A.n. 1220-30) occurring in 

the ^Dcceu Biwle, 'SG, 150. 
Broker, Mr. Wedgwood on the deriva- 
tion of. '67, 117-19. 
Bruce (J.), the sounds of tbe words 

inaccttralaly conveyed in his Abys- 

Biaian tacahularies, '44-6, 90 ; a 

curious etpuologicol blunder thence 

Brisiug, ib. 
EruQanburgh wai-song, explanation 

of a poeei^e in, 'BO-2, 101. 
a, the, quoted, '62-3, 103. 
BucuEB, Lotliair, on political teims, 

'5B, 42. 
Inddnma, or langn^;B of the islanders 

in Lakelstod, 'EG, 196. 
BvHLER, Dr. G., on the Hindu god 

Parjaaya, '89, 154-168. 
Bulgarian language, Mr, W. B. Mor- 

fiU, '77-9, IX. 
SullioH, mistranslated in a statute, 

'tS, 1 so. 
Bunnab, the languages of, '77-6, 74 ; 

derivation of the name, 77. 
Burmese language, its eharacteristica, 

'77-9, 77. 
BumET, Dr. , his views on the Ehythra 

of ijie Ancienta controverted, '6D-1, 

66. 
Bums, quolfld, '88-3, 100, 102, 105. 
BuBCHMANK, J. C. E., oQ natural 

SDimds, 'S2-3, 188-206. 
.fins^, extracts of the verb aent in for 

the Society's Dictionary P., '68, 98. 
Bjion, his singular misapplication of 

the terma }vt/i and iiiei, '44-S, aS. 



i in Weat Europe = palatal a in 
Sonecrit, 122; in Eonmnce language, 
'73-4, 423. 

Hura of the Greek Senanne con- 
sidered, '42-4, 129 ; AiBig the sama 
thing OS the English accent, ij. ; 
may fall on either syllable of the 
first and second foot of the Tragic 
Scnarins, 130 ; must fall on the last 
syllable of the third foot, i6. ; Greek 
words very rarely accented on the last 
ajllahle, 131; hence the sixth syllable 
is almost always followed by other 
syllables in the same word, 'i. ; 
various arrangement of the syllables, 
132l author's CDUDluslons, 133. 



ClB! 



California, languages of New, 'S2-S, 
7286; 'B6, 74-91. 

Camboj an language, the, '77-9, 82. 

Cambnana or Cymry m England at 
the Saion invasion, 'fifi, 216, 279. 

Cambrica : [1) The Welsh Glosses and 
verses in toe Carobridge Codei of 
Juvencus, '60-1, 204 ; (2) The obi 
Welsh Gloeses at Oiford, 232 ; (3) 
Middle-Welsh Glosses, 249 ; Ad- 
denda et Corrigenda, 28S. 

Cambridge Etymological Society, an 
account of it ami ita plan, and some 
apecimen of its laboura, 133-42. 

Cambyaes, character of, 'B2-3, 21. 

Uanum (Lat.), the term explained, 'S6, 
322. 

Cap'-a, 



them 



. words derived from i 
Qof a 



by H. Wedgwood, "Sa, 1- 

capilan, 2 ; crai, 3 ; eatit, Z- 

cabliah, 6 ; calioer, 7 ; carHw, 7-8. 
Caput = capH in Plaulus, '67, 405. 
Care, of Saxon, not of Latin origin, 

'67, 382. 
Cahet, p. 8., on the origin of the 

phrase " Wager of Law, " '42-4,67. 
Carpel, on the derivation and moaning 

of, by Mr. -Wedgwood, '89, 77. 
Case, whence the name arose, '62-8, 121. 
Case-endings, Bopp on, '62-3, 144. 
and PrepOfiitiunB, '02-3, 

200 sq. 
and Prepositions identical, 

'62-3, 122-3. 
Cassal, Prof. C., OE. Freueb Homo- 

nyms, 66-7, 104. 
Caste system of Australian tribes, '66, 



Castle of Love, Dr. R. F. Weymouth 
on, '62-3, 48. 

. quoted, '62.3, 46, 48Eqq. 
».vl ^B7 



Caiira, ei 



I, discussed, 67, 



Cat, similarity of the name for, in 
different lar^uages, '82-3, 205. 

Caterpillais, on the names of, '60-1, 89. 

Cato major, qaolad, '62-3, 21. 

Catullus, metrical laws of, '68-9, 344. 

Caucasian languages, Riniort on, by 
l-rof. Schiefner, 'TT-9, 593. 

language, Vid. Verb, '48-60. 

Caucasus, languages of, 'SB, 137. 

on the Tushi language of 

Causal verbs in Sanskrit, '62-3, 123 sqq. 

219. 
in Greek, qy., '62-3, 287. 



I. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



Caviare, the pronunciation of, '77-9, 

574. 
Caylet, C. B., on Early Alphabets, 

'78-4, 69. 
^— — on the Homeric word hxunrapi^ 

'65, 59. 



on the yeriiication of Homeric 
accentuation, '66, 63. 

the pedigree of English 



Heroic verse, '67, 43. 

remarks and experiments on 



English Hexameters, '62-3, 67. 

'ce in Norman and English, '68-9, 
418, 440. 

Celebes, language of, '77-9, 102. 

Celtic, analogies and comparisons be- 
tween Finnish and other Indo- 
Germanic words, '60-1, 281. 

languages. See Derivation 

of Words, '44-6, 205. 

languages belong to the Indo- 



European family, '42-4, 91 ; the 
Celtic of Gaul not Gaelic, 92 ; the 
Gaulish words petorritum, pempe- 
dultty candetum, epona, eporedices 
admit of satisfactory Welsh etymolo- 
gies, 93 ; velarttSf carbidolupofif belio' 
canda^ considered, ib. ; modem 
French words more Welsh than 
Gaelic, ib, ; the Gaulish inscription 
Tarwoa TriffaranoSy 94 ; the Celtic 
of South Britain related to the 
Welsh, 95 ; the curious Moeso- 
Gothic phrases idreigon (to repent) 
and aibr (an offering) possibly of 
Celtic origin, ib. ; the Welsh has 
little Teutonic admixture and there- 
fore was not the language of the 
Belgae, 96 ; the Irish has many 
elements not to be met with in the 
Welsh and Breton, 124 ; some of 
these are found in the Romance, 
Slavish and Finnish languages, ib. ; 
many in the German dialects, 125 ; 
instances, tb. ; the substantival 
ending -neas, 126; the Celts entered 
Europe from the Euxine, 144 ; this 
appears partly from history, partly 
from the Celtic elements to be met 
with in the languages of the neigh- 
bouring races, ib. ; instances from 
the Armenian and Slavish language*, 
145 ; the Slavish bolvan apparently 
the Celtic pmlccn, 148 ; in«tanceff 
from the Albanian, ib. ; in what 
manner have the Celtic dialects in- 
fluenced the current language of 
England '" 169 ; terms rfriating to 
agriculture, msutnuj, ete., wuuth 
atfUD. to be borroired' from the Celtic 



dialects of Great Britain^ 171 ; ^livso- 
Gothic words answering to Welsh 
words beginning with y«r or r«r» 177; 
Anglo-Saxon words of the same 
class, 178 ; the Welsh initial chw 

fonerally answers to the Gorman and 
anscrit initial «u\ 179 ; examples, 
ib. ; a word found in our own or any 
other language may bo shown to bo 
Celtic by its etymology or its iutriusio 
meaning, 243 ; instances, 244 ; or 
by exhibiting forms peculiar to the 
Celtic, ib. ; derivatives fornuHl by 
prefixing a consonant, 240 ; the 
Welsh prefix y«, 247 ; Gaelic prolix 
«, ib. ; Anglo-Saxon prt^fix «, 248 ; 
248 ; the Welsh initial « answering 
to St in other languages, 249. 

Celtic names in Cmsar, GlUck's books 
on, reviewed by l*rof, Siegfried, 
'67, 300. 

(^^^)> analogues of eo and 

sum, '67, 118. 

Mythology, Prof. Siegfried's 



notes on, '67, 257. 

names, contrasted as to thoir 



mode of formation with (iernmn 
names, '65, 112 ; with Latin names, 
119. 

and Gypsy numerals, '77-9, 



343. 



PhUology, '78-4, 377. 

races of Gaul, existonco of 

two different, '65, 138. 

words uwsd by early Knglisb 



writers, '52-8, 120-137. 
Celtica, Miscellanea, by Prof. Sieg- 
fried, '67, 252. 
Cerebro — hnirus, '46-8, 121. 
eh an earlier form than dg in (e.g.) 

oartouch, cartridge, etc., '60-1, 77. 
ch = (tBh) in Nonrmn and Knglish, 

'68-9, 422 ; cluinged to da (t=^dzh), 

'62-8, 38. 
X, initial, in Grw;k, «:A, Lat. r^g, {y) 

Germ, and Kng., '62-8, 123. 
Changes of pronunciation and quantity 

of words etfectcid by time, '55, 123. 
CluiraeteriMtics of Kngliith work in 

Ijhilology, '77-9, 10. 
' — of South African languages, 

'58, 107 mi\. 
CfiAuxocK, I)r.,on Wr^ilwa and Mo(»- 

quitr> vrK;abulari<.i(, '78-4, 350. 
ChaurxT, jutim of, '62-8, 59. 
quoted, '62-8, 6, 9, 24, 91, 

161. 



mti of the final e examined, 
'68-9, 428-47 ; n\H4:mt:n of )jjj» 
conjectured yrtrnmuiiaiiou, 449. 



10 INDEX TO PROC. AND TRANS. PHILOLOG. SOC. 1842-79. 



Chaucer, pronunciation of, *73-4, 296. 
pronunciation of -ere in, 

'77-9, 3*; of --yere in, '77-9, 6*, 

10*. 

faulty rbymes in, '77-9, 11*. 



Xe/»$, ancient form of x<«pj '60-1, 179. 

Chevelere Assigne, quoted, '82-3, 100. 

Child, Prof. F. J., his positions on 
Chaucer's final t disputed, '68-9, 
432-6. 

ehin^gena, ann. 7cia;r, '46-8, 121. 

Chinese, on certain peculiar and ad- 
vantageous properties of the written 
language, '80-1, 1. 

: discussion of the doctrine 

that this language is wholly mono- 
syllabic and devoid of grammatical 
formations, '52-3, 118-20. 

instrumental, '62-3, 149. 

genitive, '62-3, 149. 

liphthongs and syllables. 



'73-4, 346. 

vowel dropping, '73-4, 347. 

language : Chinese words 



beginning with k and ending with 
n,^46-8, 32, 68 ; their affinities, ih. \ 
Chinese words beginning with one 
of the labials and ending in n, 188 ; 
their affinities, ih. \ remarks on the 
Chinese tones, 33 ; vast number of 
Chinese homophones, ih. ; difficulties 
arising in the investigation of their 
affinities, ih. ; on the written lan- 
guage of China, 219 ; conflicting 
opinions as to its nature, vk. ; sup- 
posed analogy between tiie Chinese 
system and that of the Arabic 
numerals, 220 ; the latter translated 
rather than read, 221 ; Chinese 
writing at once "lexicographical" 
and partially symbolical, 223 ; hypo- 
thetical origin of their system, ih. ; 
the characters called "pictures and 
sounds" admitted to be exceptions 
to the hieroglyphical system of 
Chinese writing, 226 ; other charac- 
ters may have a phonetic origin, 
though it be now obscured, owing to 
change of pronunciation, 226 ; at- 
tempt to show, by examination of 
Chinese vocables, that the same 
sounds are generally represented by 
the same signs, ih. 

languages : the " abrupt 



tone" of the Mandarin dialect, its 
nature, '48-60, 241 ; often represented 
in the provincial dialects by one of the 
finals p, k, t, ih. ; these provincial 
dialects of indefinite antiquity, though 
merely degraded forms of tne Court 



dialect, 242 ; the final p represented 
in the later forms of language by p, 
b, or p*, b*, ih.\ roots of language 
ending with these finals, 243, etc. ; 
the final k represented in the later 
language by k, g, or k', g', 261 ; 
roots of language ending with these 
finals, 262, etc. 

Chinese roots, ideographical character 
of, '60-1, 2. 

number of compounds into 

which root enters. '42-4, 60 ; whole 
number of compounds 11,600, 62; 
of which number 8200 are com- 
prised under 33 roots, signifying 
respectively man^ woman^ hody^ 
mouthy heart, hand, disease, eye, 
flesh, foot, dog, horse, insect, fish, 
hird, tree, grain, hamboo, grass, 
gem, metals, earth, hill, sun, water, 
flre, mound, knife, silk, garment, 
wheat, speak, walk safely, ih. ; and 
under the seven roots, man, mouth, 
heart, hand, tree, grass, water, are 
comprised no less than 3385 com- 
pounds, 63. 

ChordsB vocales, Czermak's apparatus, 
'62-3, 132. 

Choriambus, what it really is, '54, 
'17-19. 

Christ's (W.) views on Plautine Pro- 
sody, commented on, '67, 414. 

Chronology: on the meaning of the 
word ffdpos as used in the Babylonian 
chronology, '44-6, 85 ; Rask's hypo- 
thesis as to its value, 86 ; according 
to Prof. Wilson the orApos a merely 
mythological period, 87. 

Xpwf<p kv (ncfifrrp(i>, suggested emenda- 
tion in II. i., '66, 66. 

Chukch, Rev. A. J., on a peculiarity 
in the quantity of the word ufiScy, 
'65, 95. 

Ci, '73-4, 53. 

Cicero : chronology of the Catilinarian 
orations considered, '46-8, 136. 

quoted, '62-3, 28. 

— — ambidextrous letters of, 
'62-3, 140 sq. 

some remarks on his speech 



" Pro Plancio," '52-3, 139-142. 
Cimbri always placed by the ancients 
at the extreme limit of the area geo- 
graphically known to them, '42-4, 
181 ; Cimori and Teutones probably 
kindred races, 184 ; testimonies in 
favour of the German origin of the 
Cimbri, Teutones and Ambrones, ih. ; 
in favour of their Gaulish descent, 
187; the latter preponderate, 189 ; 



I. nn>EX OF AVTBOVS AND SUBJECTS. 



11 



Cimbri [mutinwd]: — 
the Cimbri called the Xort^em Ocean 
MorimaruM or Dead Sea, t^. ; this 
word may be Celtic or Slaronic, 190 ; 
similaritr between the languages of 
the Celte and JBstii, 191 ; anther's 
ccmclnsions, ib. 

Clarendon Press, Agreement with, for 
publication of the Society^s Dic- 
tionary, *77-9, IT, xlix- 

Clark, It. G., his view of English 
pronunciation of Greek discussed, 
'68-9, S12, etc. 

Claake, Campbell, a translation of 
Professor fiuschmann's paper ** Om 
Natural Sounds," 'fiJM, 188-206. 

Clarke's Specimens of Dialects, etc., 
in Africa, noticed by Dr. Tiatham, 
'66, 85, etc., 185, etc. 

Classical languages, pronunciation, 
'78-4, 142. 

Cleveland dialect : its constituent ele- 
ments analyzed (mainly Scandina- 
vian), '67, 336. 

Cochin-Chinese dialects, *77-9. 86. 

Cockayne, T. 0., on certain instances 
of synkope, '64, 201-6 {$efi\fiKa, 
etc., 201 ; ^tyfievoty 203 ; tfpnryof,9^, 
205-6 ; K€KfMxBi, 205). 

on the Greek Middle verb, 

'60-2, 159-63. 

on a Lokrian inscription. 



'60-2, 175-83. 

on 'lacj '62-8, 46. 

suggestions on the critical 



arrangement of the text of the 
Medea, '44-6, 21. 

note on his statement as to 



the }> in the Anglo-Saxon Pastoral, 
'68-9, 287. 

on the construction of ti^a. 



twas^ &f with the past indicative, 

'42-4, 227 ; on the Lydian dynasty 

which preceded the Mermnadse, 274. 
Cockeram, notice of his English Dic- 

tionarie, '69, 261. 
Codonea, suggested emendation of 

Cydonia (Virg. Eel. x. 59), '67, 204. 
Coincidences in the roots of African 

and European languages, by H. 

Wedgwood, '68, 36. 
CoLEBiDGE, Herbert, his derivation of 

fghtlac, '62-8, 33 sq. 

'■ on -let, '62-8, 220m. 

on diminutives in -let, ^b*ty 

93-116. 
. on the Latin verb phro and 

some of its compounds, '67, 129-32. 
on the word gallow as used 



Coleridge, H., on the Scandinavian 
element in the English language, 
'59, 18-31. 

report of hints towards the 

explanation of some hard words and 
passages in English writers, '59, 
67-74. 

specimens of the dialects of 



some of the South Sea Islands, com- 
municated by, '69, 82-3. 

— on me word eulorum, '60-1, 



27, 



on the exclusion of certain 
words from a dictionary, '60-1, 37. 
Rev. Derwent, observations 



on the plan of the Society's proposed 
new English Dictionary, '60-1, 152. 
S. T., his mistaken use of 



by Shakespere, '68, 123. 



uprist as the preterite of uprise, 
'44-6, 191. 

-Coleridge's new word oihertcorldliness, 
'68, 296. 

doLLiNS, J. , a short vocabulary of the 
Gower dialect, '48.60, 222. 

Collum, ''back of the neck," as opposed 
to ''fugulum;' '67, 395. 

Color =eolo in Plautus, '67, 406. 

meaning and derivation of, 

'60-2, 107. 

Common things, comparison of the 
names of, in the Semitic and Indo- 
European languages, '64, 270-81. 

in English, Keltic names of, 

'67, 68, 76. 

Comparatival suffixes in Sanscrit, 
Greek, l^tin, and Gothic, compared, 
'62-8, 157w. 

Comparative plulolo^ : on the names 
of the parts of me human body in 
the Indo-European languages, '46-8, 
115 ; Niebuhr's argument in support 
of the twofold origin of the Latin 
language an unsound one, ib. ; terms 
belonging to natural objects the best 
test of me connexion between two 
languages, ib. ; on the terms x^^P* 
manus, hand, 116 ; these terms 
may have had the same origin, ib. ; 
so also ofi<f>a\os, and nave/, 119; 
u\€vri connected with the English 
elbow, 120; uvo, with humero, ib ; 
the Latin scapula with the English 
spauld, ib. ; haicrvXo, with digito, 
(TiceXoy with shin, ib. ; nieutum with 
mouth, and yews with chin and 
ffe)ia, 121 ; cerebro, with hainis^ 
ib. ; Fis with sineiv, 123 ; other 
examples, ib. ; general remarks on 
changes of the letters, i^. 

suffixes, '62-8, 10. 



12 INDEX TO PROC. AND TRANS. PHILOLOG. SOC. 1642-79. 



Comparatiye suffixes, absorbed, *02-3, 
6. 

syntax, notes on, '00-1, 168. 

Comparison of adiectives in West 
Somerset dialect, *77-9, 161. 

in spoken Swedish, 

'77-9, 609. 

Compound words with a verb as the 
first element, common in Greek, but 
rare in Latin, '58, 14. 

Compounds, Anglo-Saxon, examples 
of a term, extended into, '50-2, 
98-101. 

Dr. Murray on the treatment 

of, in the Society's Dictionary, '77-9, 
582. 

Condemnarey used for 'obliging to fulfil 
a vow,' '52-3, 185. 

Conjugation, Bopp and Miiller on, 
'62-3, 153. 

the third in Latin, the oldest, 

and denotes action, '50-2, 55 ; the 
second, a state, 56. 

Conjunctions in West Somerset dialect, 
'77-9, 234. 

Connecting vowels in Greek, Prof. H. 
Maiden, on, '62-3, 283 ; some- 
times long and why, 286 sq. y fic- 
titious forms used to account for, 
287 ; long in fut. formed from the 
form used in the present, 288 ; or 
where no short form of the verb, 
290 ; long, to prevent the roots from 
disappearing, 291 ; in 1 aor., 292 
0, 292 ; i, in inceptives in (tkw^ 293 
various before -ttj*, -poi^ '293 ; i 
before -voj, 292 sq. ; before personal 
endings, 294 ; before modal suffixes, 
295 ; before infin. ending, 297 ; in 
Latin, 315. 

Consonant defined, '62-8, 266, 

Consonants in Accadian languages:— 
(1) Gutturals, '77-9, 133; (2) 
Dentals, 134; (3) Labials, 13a; (4) 
M and V, 136; (5) Nasals, 136; 
(6) R, 137 ; (7) Sibilants, 138 ; (8) 
Aspirates, 138. 

— sounds of, in Swedish, '77-9, 

468, 478. 

vocality of, in Swedish, 

'77-9, 484. 

Danish, '73-4, 109. 

English, '73-4, 536. 

infiuence on vowels, '78-4, 



473, 521, 527, 634. 

sound changes, '78-4, 469, 



Coptic language, Dr. Carl Abel on the, 

'55, 51-6. 
Coranians, probably Carini, '55, 216. 
Cornish, on the 3rd pers. sing, imperat. 

act. in, '60-1, 171. 
Glossary, a supplement to 

the Rev. R. Williams's Lexicon 

Comu-Britannicum, '68-9, 137-250. 
language, '73-4, 165; litera- 



471, 474, 535. 

transposition, '73-4, 474. 

Norman and English, '68-9, 



411. 



ture, 171. 

Corporation and * limited liability,' 
'54, 119. 

Corssen and Curtius on accent and 
vowel change, '73-4, 314, 315. 

Corvus and comix, the confusion of 
meaning between, '54, 107. 

Costa- Rica, the Talamenca language 
of, '56, 112. 

Cotgrave, quoted, '62-3, 90. 

CouRTEiLLE, Prof. P. do, ou Turkish, 
1876-7, '77-9, 64. 

CousENS, Rev. W. E., the Malagasy 
language, '77-9, 283. 

Coveraale; we probably owe the 
phrases ** three score years and ten," 
and " God save the king" to him, 
'52-3, 7-10. 

Crawford, Rev. F. ; on the existence 
of biconsonantal prefixes of composi- 
tion in Hebrew, ^58, 63, 179. 

Craven glossary, Carr's, '62-3, 108. 

Crude form system, sanctioned in the 
New Public School Latin Grammar, 
'67, 324. 

ei-in LsLiin-U in Italian, '62-3, 214. 

Cuckoo song, '68-9, 103. 

-cm/o, 'Culoy in Lat., Mtdden v. Key, 
'62-3, 316. 

Cuneiform writing, originally hiero- 
glyphical, '58, 134 ; the varieties of, 
126 ; the inventors of, who ? 126, 
133 sq. ; remarks on the nation 
which invented, bv Dr. Lottner, 124. 

Curmudgeon, Prof. Skeaton, '77-9, vii. 

Curtius, his etymology of Greek, 1 aor. 
pass., '62-3, 124. 

CusT, R. N., on languages of Indo- 
Chinese Peninsula, and the Indian 
Archipelago, 1876-7, '77-9, 72. 

on Korean, '77-9, 613. 

Cynosura, the true position of, '52-3, 
103, 114. 

Cyrus, bis acquisition of the throne of 
Media, '52-3, 19. 

jD often interchanged with Z, '58, 39. 

J) final often interchanged with Z, 
'58, 8 ; its loss in, and addition to, 
words, '54, 46 ; dropt in archaic 
Latin prosody, '67, 404. 



I. INDEX OF ATTTHOES AND SUBJECTS. 



13 



jD medial often interchanged with F, 

'58, 8. 
-D, not a neuter suffix in Latin, 

'62-8, 7. 
2), an outgrowth from «, '62-8, 12, 

14. 
D and w, Prof. Key on the convertibility 

of, '59, 145-50 ; spider = spinner y 

219. 
D'Abbadie, A., his Abyssinian vocabu- 
laries, '44-6, 94 ; his use of the 

word Ilm onna for Galla incorrect, 

96. 
8ata), on the different forms of, by Th. 

Aufrecht, '57, 126-8. 
8aKTv\o, digito, '46-8, 121. 
Daniell, Rev. E. T., his collection of 

Lycian inscriptions, '42-4, 193. 
Danish element in English, '55, 260. 
or Scandinavian local names 

in Lancashire, '55, 263-5 ; dialectic. 

words in Lancashire, 273-6, 281 ; in 

Norfolk, 39. 

influence on English, '59, 



22, 25. 



208. 



pronimciation, '78-4, 94, 



J)ar, a prefix in German, Greek, Per- 
sian, Welsh, and Hebrew, '58, 68, 
69, n. 1, 92. 

Darius, his account of himself in the 
Behistun Inscnption, '52-8, 15 ; 
contrasted with Herodotus' s account, 
16 ; the two salient points of his 
life, 23-4 ; Henry VIl. the English 
Darius, 24 ; his temperate use of his 
power, '52-3, 25. 

Daunt for dant, and examples of 
similar prolongations, '52-3, 185. 

Davies, Rev. Dr., attempts to suggest 
the derivations and affinities of 
some Greek and Latin words, '46-8, 
89. 

' Rev. John, on the connexion 

of the Keltic with the Teutonic 
languages, and especially with the 
Anglo-Saxon, '57, 39-93. 

on Celtic words, used by 



Early English writers, '52-8, 129-37 
{pen^ 129 : kam or cam, ib. ; bragare, 
brazare^ 130; miUaUf ib. ; j^askettuSf 
131 ; pelum^ ib, ; hobelariiy ib. ; 
capull, ib. ; ken del y 132 ; greece, 
grise^ ib. ; imp, 133 ; crowd, 
crowdeTy ib. ; clutter, cluther, 
elodder, 134 ; braggot, braket, ib. ; 
hecks, kex, ib. ; tarre, terry, 135 ; 
lob, ib. ; tackle, takel, ib. ; bvgs, 
bug-a-boo, bugle-bow, boggart, 136; 
arval, arvel, arwel, ib.). 



Davies, Rev. Dr., on the races of 
Lancashire as indicated by the local 
names and the dialect of the county, 
'55, 210-84. 

on the Semitic languages, 

and their relations with the Indo- 
European class. Part I. On the 
nature and development of Semitic 
roots, '54, 169-98. Pt. II. On the 
connexion of Semitic roots with 
corresponding forms in the Indo- 
European class of languages, 238- 
281. 

Davis, Sir John F., on the classifica- 
tion of the Chinese roots, '42-4, 58 ; 
on certain peculiar and advantageous 
properties of the written language of 
China, '60-1, 1. 

Dawson, Mr. B., on final n before a 
vowel and h, in the A.V. of the 
Bible, '77-9, vii. 

Decapitated words, instances of, '67, 
392. 

Decebalus, the Dacian king, was an 
Agathyrsan, and therefore a Turk, 
'54, 109-12. 

Dedisti, dederunt, how scanned, '60-1, 
194. 

Definite article in Northumbrian dia- 
lect, t' and not 't, '67, 345, 2 Ap. 
2 Pt. p. 3. 

Delphi, meetings of the Amphictyons 
at, '52-8, 52. 

Deluge, stories of the, '78-4, 373. 

Demonstrative, the original, '59, 61. 

De Morgan, Professor, on the use of 
the verb shall and wtll, '48-50, 185. 

^tifios (tithing), Prof. Key on the deri- 
vation of, ^59, 143. 

Derivation of words : see Onomatopoeia 
and letter change ; derivations from 
pronominal and prepositional roots, 
44-6, 205 ; Shemitic, Celtic, and 
Sanscrit roots, their nature, ib. ; 
modem philologists disagree with the 
Hindoo grammarians in deriving 
pronouns and simple particles from 
verbal roots, ib. ; verbs, etc., pro- 
bably derived from the particles, 
206 ; examples from the Old German, 
ib. ; derivation of verbs, etc., from 
a preposition representing the "Welsh 
gwar, over, upon, 207, 208 ; corre- 
latives of gwar in other Indo- 
European languages, 208 ; deriva- 
tives mvolving the idea of covering, 
warning off, watching, endurance, 
etc., 209 ; crossing, turning, twist- 
ing, corrupting, etc., 210 ; gwar, 
probably a comparative and therefore 



14 INDEX TO PROC. AND TRANS. PHILOLOG. SOC. 1842-79. 



Derivation of words [continued'] :— 
not a simple wora, 211; words in- 
cluding the Gaelic preposition tar 
(over), abound in the Indo-European 
languages, and express the same 
secondary meanings as the deriva- 
tives of (/war, ib. ; derivatives of 
awary and its correlatives, in the 
Welsh, Slavonic, and the Latin, 
213 ; derivatives which have been 
affected by different letter changes, 
214. 

« of English words, '44-6, 1 ; 

of Cold Harbour, abandon, 2 ; abash, 
accoutn, afford, 6 ; attercop, 6 ; 
backgammon, 177; bo%tn, bu8k,pedi- 
gree, wanton, kickshaw, burnish, 178 ; 
bonjire, seldom, butter, fog, badger, 
179; penny, 237; lee-shore, 278. 

of wpodfXvfivos, '44-6, 217 ; 



of iHrrii, 218, 265; liropov may 
be connected with wpo, certainly 
not livith irooos, 268 ; the root of 
h^ofAat probably the same as that of 
Ayyoi, tr/ioif etc., saeer, sanetus, 
etc., 269. 

of the Latin word eastra. 



*44-6, 249 ; fors, sort, ars, metis, 
gens, 250 ; prehendo, obsoleo, 261 ; 
consul, exul,prasul,piater, laeruma, 
fama, spuma, squama, rima, 253 ; 
pis, lis, 254 ; signum, lignum, 255. 

Derivatives of the Welsh word gtcy, 
'42-4, 65. 

Denjiionymization by change of pro- 
nunciation, why commoner in English 
than in French, '67, 72. 

Deverti, its use in the sense of * taming 
out of the road,' '54, 199. 

Am as used of the final clause, on, '65, 
181. 

Dialect. See English dialects and Nor- 
thumbrian difuects. Dialects essen- 
tially languages, 44-6, 119 ; the older 
dialects, the more perfect in their 
forms, 120 ; what constitutes a 
living language, t^. ; climate a pro- 
bable agent in producing dialects, 
122 ; moimtaineers generally affect 
broad vowels and guttural conso- 
nants, 123. 

of West Somerset, grammar 

of, Mr. F. T. Elworthy, '77-9, 143 ; 
nouns in, 146; adjectives in, 157; 
numerals in, 168 ; pronouns in, 174 ; 
verbs in, 185 ; adverbs in, 223 ; 
prepositions in, 229 ; conjunctions 
in, 234 ; interjections in, 237 ; 
specimens of, 238 ; notes on. Dr. 
J, A. H. Murray, 254. 



Dialectic words, English and Scotch, 
their' claim to be admitted in the 
Society's Dictionary, '60-1, 163. 

Dialectology, Mr. H. Sweet,'77-9, 398. 

Dialects, *62-3, 3. 

methods of studying, '73-4, 

448. 



Dutch, '77-9, 29. 

Swedish, '77-9, 42. 

Turkish, '77-9. 61. 

stability of, in Enfflish, 

'77-9, 15». ^ ^ 

Malagasy language, '77-9, 



295. 



Swiss- German, Dr. L. Tob- 
ler, '77-9, 419. 

Italian, by Prof. Rajna, 



'77-9, 587. 

— English classification, etc., 



of Mr. A. J. Ellis, '77-9, 502, iii, 

iv, vi, xix, XX. 
* Diametrically opposed,' a query on 

the i)hrase, "^60-1, 197, 300. 
Dictionary, on the exclusion of certain 

words from a, '60-1, 37. 
observations on the Society's 

proposed New English, '60-1, 152. 
Philological Society's, '73-4, 



354. 



of reduplicated words in 
English, '66, A pp. 

the Society's, Dr. Murray 



on the progress of, '77-9, 567. 

sub-editors of, '77-9, 569. 

statistics of, '77-9, 570. 

specimens of, '77-9, 622, Ix. 

agreement with the Claren- 



don Press for the publication of, 

'77-9, XV, xlix. 
Dictionaries, English, chronological 

notices of, '65, 218 ; list of, 288. 
English, Mr. D. P. Fry on, 

'59, 257-72. 
Diez, '62-3, 20 ; on studying Romance 

languages, '73-4, 408. 
Digamma, sometimes represented by 

7 or /3, '44-6, 234. 
initial, often changed to 

aspirate, '62-3, 23. 

neglected by English lexi- 



cographers, '62-3, 23. 

Diminutives in -let, H. Coleridge on, 
'57, 93-115. 

importance of, '62-3, 221 ; 

often lose their original character, 
221 ; and so supplant the primitive, 
224 ; compound, 224. 

DiNDORP, Av., his rejection of the 
distich in Eur. Tro. v. 674, con- 
sidered, '44-6, 218. 



I. INDEX OF ATJTHOES AND SUBJECTS. 



15 



Diodorus, imaginary fragments from 
his eighth book, concerning Britain 
and her Colonies, '57, 219. 

Diphthongs in the Accadian language, 
77-9 132 

'- Chinese, '73-4, 346 ; (quasi) 

Danish, 107 ; English, Middle, 512, 
621 ; English, Modem, 530 ; English, 
Old, 492. 

Norman and English. '68-9, 



384. 

Disgust, expressions of, '68, 10. 
Disyllabic prepositions, why accented 

on the last syllable, '56, 137. 
Dolus and dolor confounded in Tulgar 

Latin, '67, 408. 
Dogs, on words derived from the setting 

on of dogs, by H. "Wedgwood, '69, 

128-34. 
Donaldson, Rev. J. W., on Plato's 

number, '42-4, 81 ; on Herodotus 

and the Athenians, 161. 
on the nomen of C. Verres, 

'48-60, 75. 

on the etymology of the 



Latin particle inodo, '64, 97-107 ; 
on the vocalization and evanescence 
of the nasal liquid in Greek, 
282-95. 
Donatus, his absurd derivation of 
alaceriy '62-8, 27. 

more trustworthy than 

Priscian, on Latin accent, '68-9, 
315. 

DoNNER, Dr. 0., on the relations 

of Finnish and Lappish, '77 9, 

602. 
Dontarios Inscription, Mr. Whitley 

Stokes's reading and translatio'n of, 

'67, 256. 
Doric dialect, prevalence of general 

forms in, '67, 17. 
Doubled consonants in Greek and Latin 

not properly pronounced by English, 

'62-8, 73. 
Douglas. Gawin, quoted, '62-3, 92, 93, 

103 sq., 110. 
Dryden, versification of, '62-3, 67. 
Dsuku language, '68, 117 sq. 
Duals, a variety of plurals, '62-3, 

146 sq. ; pass. 1st pers. not originally 

distinct from plurals, 300. 
LuleiSj on the derivation of, by Th. 

Aufrecht, '59, 14. 

its connexion with deliciaf 

delieatusj delectare, '60-1, 150. 

Duuel, duu, etc., Semi- Sax., '62-3, 

97, 99. 
Duntaxaty Professor Key on, '69, 

136-8. 



Durham Ritual, collation of, by Prof. 
Skeat, '77-9, 61* ; description of 
the MS., 55*; Stevenson's edition 
of, 68*. 

Autnrapij on (Homeric word), '65, 59. 

Dutch lan^age : list of works illus- 
trating the Dutch provincial dialects, 
'44-6, 128. 

— • report on, 1876-7, by Dr. 

J. H. Galles, '77-9, 16 ; grammars, 
26 ; dictionaries, 27 ; dialects, 29: 

Dyer, T., on the noun or name as an 
instrument of reasoning, '46-8, 137. 



^, a, and o, closely related in Greek, 
'62-8 299 

e for ai in Early French, '77-9, 36*. 

e final in Chaucer, '68-9, 428-447, is 
not to be generally pronounced after 
r, 436 ; e inflexional has no phonetic 
value in Early English, 442 ; e Nor- 
man and Early English, 371. 

e sounds in Chaucer, '77-8, 13*. 

ri and », introduction of, into Greek, 
by Eucleides, a.d. 403 ; their quan- 
tity subsequently, '66, 127, 129. 

Early Engfish Poems, '62-3, 109, 
n. 1. 

English pronunciation, '68-9, 

367-449. 

French Text Society, '77-9,6. 



Earwigs, ants, and beetles, on the 
names of, '68, 93, 96. 

Eclipsis. See Orthography, 

Ecthlipsis in Plautus, '67, 403, 409. 

Editing MSS., methods of, '73-4, 333. 

Edkins, J., on Chinese diphthongs, 
'73-4, 346. 

ge sounds in Chaucer, '77-9, 17*. 

Egyptian language, a sister-family of 
the Semitic, '60-1, 115. 

ein-fach (G.), fach = Ij, plica (origi- 
nally) a flat surface, '62-3, 127; 
eis, the old form of the nom. plur. 
of the Latin 2nd decl., 179. 

-el, the diminutival sufiix, and its 
representatives in verbs, '66, 6 ; no 
true English diminutives in : all 
borrowed, '57, 107, 108. 

'el {le)f Eng. diminutival suffix, '62-8, 
225; -el, S. Germ., diminutival 
suffix, 226. 

Elements of language ending in n and 
beginning with k, kw, k% k'w, h^ 
hw, g, w, or an open vowel, '46-8, 
31 ; the principle in which the 
groups of meanings are arranged, 
34 ; elements signifying to originate, 
to begin, to grow^ ib. ; elemeiLts, 



16 



ISDEX TO PROC. AND TRiNB, PHIIiOLOO. 80C. 1M2-79. 



Mementa of langua^ [contiimtdj t — - 
signifying odwhitI motioQ, ruahicig, 
OTert^king, BtrujfgliDg 'with, aeizingf 
etc. ; on the feelings wMeh aucom- 
pony or follow these actionB, excite- 
ment, ill-will, veintion, etc., 37; 
elements eijjriifyiug to jiiisrce, to 
wound, lo bitr.', Im na^tc, ttc., 39 ; 



-II; 






(havc^ B, 



to he. dprivp 
meaning end, 43 ; elemeale which 
seem to be fotrnded on the Dotion of 
cuTTilinear motion, 71 ; meaaings 
which are connected with diffusion 
a» their primniy idea, 79 ; brilUancj', 
etc., SI ; darkness, fumea, odours, 
Gt«., 95; sound, S7 ; elemente which 
end in « and begin with the labial 
p, 187 ; the Dteamnga to hurry, to 
labour, to mauage, ii. ; to pierce, to 
BBparate, to grind, 189 ; order, 
armu^ement, 190; linear extension, 
ISl ; Kgretment, ete.,ti. ; condensa- 
tion, ui^oumulEition, eto., 192, ele- 
ments wbicb end in n and b^n with 
to, 193 ; meanings to hunj forwards, 
to Beak to obtain, eto., i*. ; to 
pierce, wound, cut, eto., 194; pro- 
minence and ilfl derivative meaniugs, 
195 ; to curl, to intertwine, etc., ii. ; 
diffusion and ila derivative meanings, 
19S ; elementa which end in « and 
take m for their initial, 197 ; effort, 
and more particularly mental effort, 

divisioE, iillntnient, etc., 199. 

of luuguuge : meaus of ascer- 
taining thoir identity in different 
languages, '48-BO, 240 ; elements 
ending with p or its repreaenlativea, 
242 ; elements ending with i or its 
repreaentativea, 246. 

Eleven and twelve, on their termina- 
tion lika in (Lithuanian), etc., '67, 

mea-. Germ. preSi, '9B-3, 7. 

Elliiuds, meaning of tbe term. 'U-6, 6; 
ellipsis of the verb in English synta^i , 
lA. ; of tbe copula when the predi- 
cate precedes the subject, 7 ; Mil- 
ton's use of this idiom, ii, ; copula 
omitted in other case, ii, ; in clauses 
introduced by the conjunction copu- 
lative, S ; verb snbstkntive, and in- 
determinate pronoun omitted (there 
are] fele of hem, infinitive of verb 
substantive omitted after the verbs, 
do {to cause), know, heat, fear, etc.. 
9 ; eases of ellipsis where the auiil- 



iariea enter into combination with 
the verb, ii. ; luve omitted in the 
first tense infinitive and also after 
mav. can, will, shall, ete. ; I would 

done, but, ete,, ili. ; Shak- 

use of this idiom, 10 ; 

mtary verb omitted after 
the auxiliaries, ii. ; verb omitted 
when the act is referred to or sug- 
gested in the sentences, 1 1 ; ellipsis 
of the verb go after will, shall, ete., 
ib. ; of hnve after leiil, 12 ; other 
cases in which the verb is omitted 
after the auxiliaries, ib. ; omission 
of the verb go in cases where there 

aniiliary, 13 ; Shakspere's 



ellipsis of 



idiom desire him % 
for France, etc, ib. ; 
the verb say, though t 
aniiliary, ib. ; Milton's use of this 
idiom, lb. ; change from the ijist to 
the third person without the intro- 
ductory phrase " he said," ib. ; 
common in the Old-English, in 
clauses introduced by and or ae, 14 ; 
in similar constructions the verb ask 
omitted, ii. ; the phrases to see if, 
to know whether, ete., omitted in 
the clause c;tplainiiig the motive, 

Ellipsis of the English pronoun 
personal before the second!^ person 
singular of the verb, '42-4, 218; 
when twn clauses are brought to- 
gether without a conjunction, or 
with a con] auction continuaiive, 
215; when the pronouns expressed 
and omitted require diSerent cases, 
219; ellipsis of the objective pro- 
nonfi, 22U ; of the pronoun indeter- 
minate, ib. ; of the pronoun relative, 
221. 



(tcXiit, oKta-), denominatjval ori^n 
of verbs in, 14. 

. — paper on the only English 

proclamation of Henry III., 18 Oct 
1268, and its treatment by former 
editors and translators, with editions 
of the Cuckoo Song, and the Pri- 
soner's Prayer, Lyncs of the I3th 
century, '68-9, 1-13S. 

. — on accent and emphasis, 

'73-4, 113 ; English dialectology, 
447 : Greek pronunciation, 388 ; 
^ '■ - '* "ng ; phono- 



I 



I. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS, 



17 



Ellis, A. J., on e sound in Chancer, 
'77-9, A. 13 ; Anglo-Cymric Score, 
316 ; classification of English dia- 
lects, 562, iii, xix, xx ; on Engy- 
type and phonetic writing, x. 

El WORTHY, Mr. F. T., dialect of "West 
Somerset, *75-6, 197 ; grammar of, 
'77-9, 143. 

jE'in*OM;tf//^rf=huried(Shak.), '60-1,142. 

Emphasis in French, *73-4, 270 ; 
physical constituents of, '73-4, 113. 

Enclitic and proclitic, accents on, '56, 
135. 

Endlicher's Gaulish Glossary, a note 
on, by Whitley Stokes, '68-9, 
251-4 ; -ent, pronounced in Norman 
and English, 416. 

-0/2, diminutiTal suffix, '62-3, 224. 

-enffa, A. Sax., '62-3, 94. 

England, Keltic names of places in, 
'57, 91. 

English, the Saxon sources of, dis- 
cussed, '65, 245-52; Keltic element 
in, 211 ; some new words proposed 
by Mr. Wa.ttSj junior iti/, posteriority f 
eldernesa^ shortemesa^ youngemesa^ 
293 ; longerneas, atrangernesSf rich- 
ernesSj laiernesSy wiaerness, Jirstnesx, 
lastness, underwater, onsea, 294 ; 
httsbandhood, wifehood, 295 ; too 
much bound by the law of usage 
and caprice, 301 ; a plea for its wise 
enlargement, 302-4. 

" on the Scandinayian element 

in, by Herbert Coleridge, '69, 18-31. 
some hard words and passages ex- 
plained, 67-74 ; therne, 67 ; spate, 
misrempe, stare, 68 ; me, granelt, 
schindes, 69 ; moren, ma, schrogen 
suet, 71 ; kagleweg, colomy, pisseris, 
72. 

Modem, vowel sounds, '73-4, 



510, 515, 610 ; Old, philology, 440 ; 
Old, vowel sounds, 486 ; periods 
of, 486, 497, 515, 617 ; phonetic 
change of, 497 ; pronunciation, 243 ; 
rhythm, 138, 624 ; sounds, history 
of, 461 ; vowels— see Vowel ; vowel 
intensification, 289 ; word lists, 542, 
611. Accent in, 128; characteristic 
speech units, 126 ; dialects, 247, 
447 ; Early, works on, 235, 440, 446; 
Early, period, 620 ; Early, pronun- 
ciation, 207, 621. Intonation, 128 ; 
metre, 624 ; middle, orthography, 
497, 608 ; middle, vowels, 498, 508, 
606 ; modem, five periods of, 616. 
dictionary, earliest, '65, 229 ; 



etymologies, miscellaneous, 1, 6, 
187, 307. 



English etymologies, by H. Wedg^ 
wood, '68, 1. 

' history, Diodorussed, '54, 

219-28. 

language, how far influenced 

by the Celtic dialects of Great 
Britain, '42-4, 169. Substantives 
plural in ren, 115 ; collective sub- 
stantive in y, in ry, 116; gentile 
nouns in e, 102 ; in es, 108 ; in en, 
109 ; in iske, 110 ; in reis, 113 ; in 
ry, 117; names of districts in e 
104 ; in es, 107 ; men or on, 110 
in slee, 111 ; in ye, ib, ; in res, 114 
in ry, 117 ; in ings, ib. ; in fotk, 
118. The indefinite declension of 
the adjective, 66 ; the genitive 
plural in er, 67 ; in ers, ib. ; plural 
mfiexion e, 70 ; the definite declen- 
sion, 72 ; the same as the n declen- 
sion of the substantive, 73; en some- 
times a nominatival ending, ib. ; the 
phrases himselven, themselven, etc., 
74 ; es an inflexion of the plural 
adjective, 75 ; of the plural relative, 
76. P/onouns personal, 277; various 
forms of the first pronoun personal 
I, ich, iche, ^che, ib. ; dual forms, 
wit, git, unc, inc, 278 ; hun, objective 
case of he, 279 ; his, genitive of it, 
280 ; it used as a genitive case, 281 ; 
the masculine pronoun used when 
speaking of things inanimate, 282 ; 
vtM, yees, ys, objective cases plural 
of the three pronouns personal, 284 ; 
the emphatic or indeclinable pronoun, 
285 ; /, he, we, used as objective 
pronouns, 285, 292 ; ye, they,- she, 
used as objective pronouns, 286 ; 
mun or min used as the objective 
case plural of the third pronoun 
personal, 286 ; pronouns which take 
a nasal as their nominatival ending, 
287 ; wheym or whom used as a 
nominative, 289, 290 ; pan and pam 
used as nominatives, 289 ; him ap- 

?arently used as a nominative, 290. 
'he genitives plural our, your, etc., 
67 ; thb doubly infiected genitives 
oum, yours, etc., ib. ; the doubly 
inflected genitives hiss^n, our^n, etc., 
70. Orthography : — The present 
mode of spefling the passive parti- 
ciple erroneous, 7 ; the old spelling 
accommodated to the pronunciation 
and more correct, ib. ; means for 
expressing each elementary sound of 
our language by a distinct character, 
215. 
-. language : its probable future 



18 INDEX .TO PKOC. AJND TRANS. PHILOLOG. SOC. 1842-79. 



English language [continued] : — 
position, '48>50, 207 ; tendency to 
the establishment of a ^' nniTersal 
language,'' ib. ; the place once filled 
by the Latin, now occupied by the 
French, ib, ; the predominance of 
the French weakened by the culti- 
yaiion of several new languages — 
the Kussian, Hungarian, etc., 209 ; 
theories of Riyarol and Du Kowre to 
account for the prevalence of the 
French language, t^. ; circumstances 
which formerly contributed to it, 
now favour the spread of the Ger- 
man, 210 ; Hume's opinion as to 
the future importance of the English 
language, 211 ; its great prevalence 
at the present day, 213 ; ciiteum- 
stances which may interfere with its 
general adoption as a medium of 
communication, 213 ; on the use of 
the verb shall and will, 185. 

■■ metre, by Prof. J. B. Mayor, 

'77-9, 267. 

Southern, granmiatical forms 



of in A.D. 1220, '66, 160; Latin 
Dictionary, earliest known, 219. 

substantives in om, '56, 341 ; 



verbs in wA, 344 ; antiquity of, 354. 
syntax : a substantive often 



qualified by a succeeding substan- 
tive, '42-4. 75, 263 ; both substan- 
tives put in the plural number, 76 ; 
use 01 the dative with the sense of 
untOf 262 ; with the sense of from, 
ib, ; dative generally follows the 
verb and precedes the accusative, ib, ; 
different order in the Old-English, 
263; use of dative as an instru- 
mental case, a. ; to express relation, 
264 ; use of the dative with the verb 
substantive and with the verbs to 
come, to fall, to hap, etc., 266; in 
the phrases him adde betere, me 
rather had, etc., 266; use of tiie 
dative as a substitute for the genitive, 
ib. ; we U8telf, 263 ; to denote the 
person to whom some advantage 
accrues, 267 ; the dativui ethicus, 
ib. ; dative of the reflective pronoun, 
268, 259 ; when this dative is used, 
the nominative is often omitted, 260 ; 
this dative often treated as a sub- 
stitute for the nominative, t^. ; use 
of the dative in such phrases as it ts 
me, 191 ; the dative absolute, 192. 
The doubly inflected forms, ours, 
yours, etc., our*n, yourn, etc., only 
used absolutely, 68 ; our, your, etc., 
sometimes us^ absolutely, *6. ; the 



phrases her eyder, your noither, etc., 
69. The adjectives during the Old- 
English period agreed in number 
with therr substantives, 70, 74 ; 
under what circumstances they took 
their deflnite form, 72 ; the adjective 
self very generally took its deflnite 
form selve, 26 1 ; self and selve always 
follow the dative of the reflective 
pronoun, me self, him seff etc., ib. ; 
the neuter adjective often treated as 
a substantive mi seff, etc., ib., the 
forms htmselven, myselven, etc., 74, 
261 ; the adjective one also follows 
tiie dative of the reflective pronoun 
him one, etc , 262 ; the neuter adjec- 
tives often treated as a substantive 
his. one, etc., ib. ; the compound 
alone, or *lone enters into the same 
constructions, him alone, your alone, 
etc., ib. ; the syntax wesylf, ussylf, 
etc. , 263 ; we ussylf, they themself, 
ib, ; themselves, ourselves, etc., 264 ; 
use of the genitive ones, hire anes 
muS, etc., ib. Use of the indeter- 
minate pronoun me, 161 ; the in- 
determinate pronoun it with a plural 
signification, 153 ; used for cul the 
genders, ib, ; the phrases it rains, it 
hails, etc., 166; it used as predi- 
cate, it am I, etc., ib. ; indeter- 
minate pronoun the or ia, 168 ; the 
adverbs the-furth, the -but, etc., ib. ; 
indeterminate pronoun that as sub- 
ject, ib. ; as predicate, ib. ; indeter- 
minate pronoun there as subject, ib. ; 
as predicate, ib, ; adverbs thereto, 
hereto, etc., 160. 
English dialects. See Northumbrian 
dialect : the settiers in our Midland 
and Eastern counties descended from 
the Angli of Tacitus, '44-6, 16 ; 
monuments of their early language, 
16 ; the Psalter, Vesp. i. ib. ; points 
in which the dialect of the Psalter 
differs from ordinary Anglo-Saxon, 
17 ; the Durham Bible and Durham 
ritual, ib. ; particulars in which the 
dialect of these MSS. differs from 
that of the Psalter, 18 ; possibly the 
dialect of the first may be Northum- 
brian and that of the Psalter Mercian, 
id. ; the Bushworth Gospels show 
an admixture of West- Saxon forms, 
ib. ; specimens of the Bushworth 
and of the Hatton Gospels, 19 ; the 
Northern MSS. of the fourteenth 
century exhibit a marked change of 
dialect, 77; in what this change 
consists, t^. ; partly in the introduc. 



I. IXDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



19 



English dialects [emtinued] : — 
tion of Norse terms, 78 ; the inscrip- 
tion in Aldbnrgh church, ib. ; names 
of Yorkshire proprietors in Domesday 

Senerally Norse, ib. ; in the ** Cursor 
[undi" and the »* Metrical Psalter" 
Norse words and phrases common, 
79 ; many Northumbrian MSS. 
claimed as Scotch, 80 ; extract from 
the. "Metrical Psalter,'' t*. ; and 
from the old rersion of the York 
Mysteries, ib. 

etymology. See Etymology 

and English Verbs. 

- syntax. See Ellipsis. On the 



use of the collective noun, '44-6, 69 ; 
Anglo-Saxon nouns conveying an 
aggregate meaning generally neuter, 
ib. ; Anglo-Saxon neuters generally 
the same in the singular and plural 
numbers, ib. ; and may have been 
originally collective nouns, ib. ; how, 
upon such hypothesis, the individual 
was indicated, ib. ; how indicated in 
"Welsh under similar circumstances, 
ib. ; collective nouns which now re- 
quire the definite article take no 
article in the Old English, ib. ; 
singular substantives often used in a 
collective sense, and construed with 
plural verbs tfaid adjectives in Anfflo- 
Saxon poetry, 70 ; Grimm misled by 
his ignorance of this idiom, ib. ; 
collective noun joined to a plural, 
kings and knight ^ 71 ; used with a 
genitive plural or with one of the 
possessive pronouns, owr, their, etc., 
their breast, etc., ib. ; with nume- 
rals, fourteen foot, ib. ; or with the 
adjectives many, divers, etc., many 
baroun, 72 ; the numeral and its 
noim treated as if they constituted 
a compound, an tuo }er, 73 ; the 
noun sometimes plural, a nineteen 
years, ib. ; abstract nouns used as 
collectives, ib. ; corporate bodies 
indicated by the name of their 
patron, ib. ; a race by that of their 
country : these collective nouns 
agree with nouns and verbs of dif- 
ferent numbers, 74 ; difficult in some 
cases to distinguish between a collec- 
tive and a plural noun, ib. ; traces 
of the old neuter declension in the 
Old English, ib. ; the Old English 
sterre, stede, asse, may be northern 
plurals, 76 ; the participial nouns in 
nd peculiarly apt to take a collective 
meaning, ib. ; hence probably the 
Anglo-lSaxon plurals fryndt /y^» 



ib. ; Old English collectives in fid, 
76. 

English verb substantive and auxiliary, 
'44-6, 223 ; verb substantive, its 
plural forms, ib. ; the verb be used to 
express future time, ib. ; tvor'pe, 224 ; 
an infinitive following the verb sub- 
stantive indicates obligation, ib. ; the 
gerund formerly used for this pur- 
pose, and sometimes with a passive 
signification, ib. ; the idiom he is to 
blame, 226 ; the uninflected verb is 
followed by an infinitive denotes 
future time, 7'w try, etc., ib. ; tiie 
idioms /'« fgo, thou'st hear, 226 ; 
to formerly preceded the gerund, 
and at a later period the present 
infinitive, 227 ; even after the auxi- 
liary verbs, thou maist to stande, 
ete., ib. ; shall, its original meaning, 
228 ; used to express future time, 
ib. ; will, used for the like purpose, 
ib. ; modern use of these verbs as 
auxiliaries, ib. ; construction of let 
with a noun as object followed by 
an infinitive, 229 ; omission of the 
indeterminate pronoun after let, let 
hwigy tne, ete., ib. ; construction of 
do (to cause) with an accusative and 
infinitive, 230 ; the indeterminate 
pronoun omitted after do, I shall do 
{them) bete the, 231 ; ^ as a mere 
auxiliary, ib. ; generally denotes 
emphasis, ib, ; in Dorsetshire denotes 
a continuing action, ib. ; the pre- 
terites of gin used as mere auxiliaries, 
he gan die, they can begyn, etc., 
ib. ; idioms become to be, come to, 
be, 232 ; preterite of corns used as 
an auxiliary, he com gon, ib. 

verb, its orcfinary inflexions, 

'44-6, 241 ; Old EngUsh verbs 
expressing present time follow three 
schemes of inflexion, ib. ; the 
present indicative according to the 
first or i conjugation, %b. ; ac- 
cording to the second, 242 ; 
accordmg to the third, 243 ; exam- 
ples of the subjunctive, ib. ; of 
the imperative, 244 ; the i form of 
the infinitive still lingers in our 
western dialects, ib. ; but is now 
only used absolutely, 246 ; the 
gerund, t^. ; the present participle 
in ende or ing, ib. ; the Ola English 
forms, com^, faiy, help\, ete., 
analogous to the Latin fert, vult, 
est, ete., and to Sanscrit verbs of 
the second conjugation, 246 ; verbs 

, belonging to the % conjugation answer 



20 IXDEX TO PHOC. AND TBAXS. PHILOLOQ. BOC, 1842-79. 



English tbtI) [amtinurd'] : — 
to Greek uiicuioflEi verba and to 
Sanscrit rerbs gf the fourth and 
tenth conjugatioBB, ib. ; eiamnlcx 
■whera the correlntiyB Terbe follow 
the eorreBponding CDnjugstions in 
other Isn^nages, ib. ; inreigp verliB 
nhich were introduced during the 
Old English period senerally fol- 
lowed the I GOnjngatioD, ii. ; pre- 
terite of Terbs whose past participle 
ended in d, ib- ; wben the pregent 
followed the i inflenions, the preterite 
and past participles took the endings 
fde, ed, ib. ; in other uases, de, 4, 
ii, ; preterite of verbs whose past 
participle ended in h, 247 ; some- 
times thangcd its towel in the 
plural, ib. ; took ( as the infleiion 
of the second person singnlar, 248. 

Terb, ABomaliea of the, arising 

from the letter changee, '44-6, 189 ; 
Yerbe ending imjortfonued the third 
person Angular in I, lenl !oTeeniitih, 
ill. ; so also verbs ending with a 
rabilant, rial for riielh, 191; tha 
nature of this inflexioa misbikeii hj 
ColeridB;e, Spenser, and several of 
our ol£r writers, ib. ; verbs endin? 
in li or t often dropped the iinal 
letter in the second peison singular 
of the present, 192 ; the forms ili,l, 
WBtl, lAmi, etc., ii, ; verbs ending 
in d and forming preterite and pa^t 
paitiuiple in de, d, did not generallj 
oonhle the d, sends, tend, 194 ; in 
some dialects when the verbal base 
ended in /, m, n, Id, ni, tid, Ihe 
pret«rit« and past participle took the 
endings it, I, instead of A', d, 196 ; 
in uertaiu fioithem dialects thej 
took these endings in all cases, ib. ; 
attempt to scconut for these peculiar 
endings, 196; verbs which formed 
their past participle in en often sub- 
stituted I for m in the Uld English, 
ib. ; the forma text (ute'tl) and litxl 
(ly'it), 199 ; the preterites ahrigkt, 
shrieked, raught, reached, etc., 200 ; 
verbs forming the post i^iticiple in 
t> and endil^ in id, nd, sometim«B 
changed the d to ( in the prelcrite, 
viitliiiiilt ifcithheld), ii. ; vurbs 
ending in/changed/ to v before an 
inflexiun opening with a vowel, 201 ; 
reths ending in th sometimes changed 
tit to d ia the preterite and parti- 
ciple, ib, : permutation of 1 1« r in 
the preterite and past participle, 202 ; 
of y tu j in the present tense, ib. ; 



verbs ending in it or c ofl^n dropped 
those letters, mat for niat-ei, 203; 
kithc, graithe, etc., absorb the th 
in the preterite, kidde, graide, 
204. 
English verb, Essential anomalies in 
the stmctnre of the, '44-6, 149 ; the 
anomalous verbs according to Tea 
Eatti's classification, ib, ; the present 
in its infleiions resembles the pre- 
terite of those verbs which formed 
the past partiuiple in n, ib. ; the 
second person singular in some cases 
takes the inflexion t, ISO ; the pre- 
terite generally resembles the pre- 
terite oi verbs, which form the jiast 
participle in d, ib. ; the verb is used 
without change of stniuture for both 
numbers, and for all tha persona, 
161 ; ill, second peraon aingalar, 
1S2 ; the preterite sing, wai, were, 
Koa, plur. vteren, ib. ; wor, sing. 
ib. ; sing. v»a, trniri, vai, 153 ; 
tcait, second person singular, mo- 
derUi ib- ; the verbs can ' to he 
able," All 'to give,' min 'to he ob- 
liged,' ib. ; their mode of forming the 
preterite, ii. ; cimld now represents 
eoade, the old preterite of can, 164 ; 
ken, the causative verb, correspondii^ 
to can, 154 ; begimlh the northern 
preterite of btgin, 166 ; the verbs 
way ' to be able, ' ihc ' to be obliged 
bj duty,' dote ' to prosper,' ib. ; form 
theb preterite by adding the suffix 
de, ib. ; the Northern form drih 
(for dmc) used as a. preterite, 158 ; 
Wat and mot have preterite in I'e, 
ln9 ; the verb <ci»f manufactured by- 
our modem editors and lexicogra- 
phers from teinte, tbe preterite of 
u'd(, 160 ; moi sometimes used by 
Nortiiem writers as a preterite, 101 ; 
tbe Tcrbfl dor and ihsrf ' to need,' ib. ; 
singular confusion between tbe verbs 
dar and thar, 102 ; i]tiiti changed its 
vowel in the plniul till a very Ute 
period, 163 ; the auomBlnus verbs 
often used their preterite with a 
present signification, tbe reason, ib, ; 
the verb teill took in the indicative 
the inflexions of the eubjunctive, 
164 ; in some dhilects had its radical 
vowels broad, pres. sing, wtdle, wnlt, 
umlh, pret. wo/de, ib. ; in others 
narrow, pres. Kills, pret. ieilde, ib. ; 
OK takes tbe narrow vowel in the 
present, and the broad in the pre- 
terite tviil, tumid, as in the Anglo- 
Saxon, ib. 



I. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



21 



Engytype and phonetic writing, by Mr. 
A. J. EUis, '77-9, X. 

€uij in, and related words. Prof. Key's 
paper on, '64, 85-95. 

Ennius quoted, '62-8, 21. 

-ent, pronounced in Norman and 
English, '68-9, 416. 

So, oe, English, '68-9, 396. 

Epenthesis, Bopp on, '62-8, 156. 

misuse of th^e term, '46-8, 

46 ; a radical letter has often been 
considered as epenthetic, ib. ; exam- 
ples of allegea epenthesis, comburoy 
amburo, ambedo, adbitere, redire, 
prodere, prodesse, 47 ; prasens, ah' 
sens, prcBgnans, cognatus, agnatus. 
cognomen, neclegere, negotium, 
neeopinus, 48 ; nequinont danunt, 
49 ; defffioSf aoKccripopos, TereAcir- 
jjifvos, yivorriKos, ib. ; ipoLfffxa, 50 ; 
^afJLa(Ti,VK05, irAryliiriros, rapa^imros, 
ib. ; ToXatva, repeti^a, and 8oT6ipa,51 ; 
the v€<pi\KV(rriKov, ib. ; ice, Kev, and 
av, 52 ; cases in which a privative 
appears to be used before a vowel, 
f^. ; the French phrases aime-t-il, 
etc., 55 ; the German terms eigent' 
lieh, meinetwegen, heidelbeere, birken- 
battm, hochzeitstag, ib, 

-ere, instances of long quantity in 
Latin infinitive, '66, 60. 

'ere, pronunciation of words ending in, 
in Chaucer, '77-9, 3* ; in Robert of 
Gloucester, 6*; in Robert de Brunne, 
7* ; in Suffolk, 9* ; -ere rhymes in 
Chaucer, table of, 46*. 

Eregba language, '68, 118 sqq. 

Er, German prefix, examined, '66, 
33. 

-6f)o, not -repoy '62-8, 10. 

-er, -or, suffix, as in writer, sailor, 
explained, '66, 295. 

Erromango language, short vocabulary 
of, '62-8, 59. 

-ei, Fr. suffix = Lat. -ec, 62-8, 14 ; et, 
in English diminutives, 222 sq. 

-^et, terminal, discussed, '67, 105. * 

Et, que, atque, difference in use of, 
'66, 49. 

-etje, Dutch diminutival suffix, '62-3, 
225. 

Ethnography of Africa. See Abys- 
sinia : — current notions as to the 
affinities of the African languages, 
'44-6, 219; Adelung and Prichard 
recognize only the more definite 
groups, 1*. ; materials which have 
been collected relative to African 
ethnology, 220 ; the equator an im- 
portant Ime of demarcation, 221. 



Ethnography of North America : -^ 
American language isolated from the 
others, '44-6, 31 ; their affinities 
shown by their vocabularies as well as 
by their grammar, ib. ; the groups 
of languages called Athabascan and 
Kolooch, and most of those spoken 
in Oregon and California, connected 
with the Esquimaux, ib. ; short 
vocabulary of the Ahnenin, 32 ; of 
the Blackioot, 34 ; its affinities more 
with the Algonkin tongues than 
with those of other recognized 

f roups, ib. ; numerals of Fitz-Hugh 
ound, 38 ; vocabularies or the Crow 
and Mandkn languages, ib. ; both 
languages aj^ear to be Sioux, ib. ; 
the Mandan compared with the 
Minetare and other Indian dialects, 
39 ; comparative vocabularies of 
the Pawnee and Riccaree, 42 ; 
the Caddt) related to the Iroquois 
languages, 44 ; affinities of the 
Natchez*, ib. ; of the new Califomian 
tongues, 47 ; the Sacks and Foxes 
belong to the Algonkin stock, 48 ; 
the language of the loway Indians 
connected with that of the Sioux, 
Ottoes, etc., ib. 

Etonian pronunciation of Latin and 
Greek, strictures on, '67, 245, 1 Ap. 
40; '78-4,402. 

Etruscan, theories on, '78-4, 361. 

Etymological grouping of words in a 
dictionary, argued for, as against 
alphabetical, by Mr. Fry, '69, 257- 
260, 271-2. 

Etymologies, badger, '78-4, 329 
blaireau, 329 ; bully, 331 ; campana 
62 ; chinee, 253 ; cherry, 253 
conundrum, 66 ; delft, 63 ; douche 
67; filibuster, 330; gallipot, 65 
gallitiles, ib. ; gleye (Dutch), ib. 
guignoD", 329 ; hum, 61 ; humming 
ale, ib. ; lane, 329 ; lawn, ib. ; la 
figure, 328 ; maltee, 253 ; meropy,7 ; 
30 ; mum, 60 ; pea, 253 ; pickling 
of herrings, 60 ; portuguese, 253 ; 
quandary, 66 ; shay (chaise), 253 ; 
snerry, ib, ; si (sic, so), 52, 69 ; 
sicut, 63 ; slobber, 64 ; swamp, ib. ; 
umber, 63 ; waine, 328 ; wanion, 
ib. ; windlass, 68. 

English, '68, 1 ; '77-9, vii, 



viu, xu, xm, xvui. 
Etymology. See "^^ 
final d of the "Ex 
answers to the A' 
Gothic ded, '44-w, 
hypothesis thai 4M 



22 INDEX TO PROC. AND TRANS. PHILOLOG. SOC. 1842-79. 



Etymolo^ [continued'] : — 
reduplication, and resembles the 
Engusli auxiliary did, 51 ; the pre- 
terite did not formed on the principle 
of the weak perfect, ib. ; probably 
among the oldest of the strong per- 
fects, 52 ; perfects of reduphcation 
common in the Gothic, ib. ; Anglo- 

' Saxon kehtf ib, ; English did com- 
pare with the Latin dedij ib, ; their 
identity maintained, 53 ; English do 
and Latin dare probably the same 
word, as appears from the Latin 
compounds abdere, perdere^ etc., and 
the English compounds don^ doffy 
etc., 54. 

of certain Greek and Latin 

words, &j8a|, acerviUf acieSy acus^ 
adulor, '46-8, 89; &7aira», ^7^X77, 
ay p65, &7pwiryoj, tiyx^, ^7X'> &5os, 
&CTOS, akif alyoSf a\a$a(rrpos, alaeer, 
t\v(ris, alius J tkkffnroy, amarus, 
amniSf hvdsyw, aper, apeXy kir4irn, 
AirAoof, aqua, i^x*^i area, hptBfxos, 
atrox, augur, aurum, 91 ; axilla, 
baculus, fiaios, /SoAAw* fitwa, fiairrn, 
fiap$apos, fiourtK^uSf bibo, bitumen, 
bonus, fijitrau, /3A.cxi0. /Sopxi, fietrKv, 
fiovSi fiovfjuurrost 92 ; fiovwos, fipaSvt, 
fipaxiMv, brevis, bucea, buccina, 
fiv9o5, eachinnus, eado, earimonia, 
calamus, camelus, ealleo, ealo, candeo, 
cano, capio, 93 ; caput, career, earo, 
earpo, earus, eatena, eavus, eeler, 
eera, cerebrum, cervisia, 94. 

of the Greek words «-«iraf, 



'48-50, 242 ; vovx^^, jccr^por, 
K&iros, 243; jcttros, koxw, Kimi, 
244 ; Koirls, Koiwis, irwcXAoy, irviSas, 
Kvwas, 245 ; rms, 246 ; ^ooyw, 
262; mryas, varfos, varytt, vax^S) 
«in'«w» ''Vyos, 'Tvyri, wiryh 263 ; 
KotKtM, 264 ; rvxyiy 266 ; raryri, rays, 
rwcox, TOKOS, 267 ; of i^e Latin 
words eapio,eapulus, 244 ; focus, ftex, 
262 ; U^, teges, 268 ; of ^e English 
words Christmas box, to seorcK, to 
pant, relay, rely, housings, 125 ; 
fchip,wipe, swip, swipe, 1 26 ; to eauik, 
pantaloon, muscovado, 128 ; dungeon, 
quoit, 128 ; to bale, a board, to peep, 
129; charcoal, IZO; Jade, to stroll, 
to abridge, to allay, to assuage, 131 ; 
Jizz, fuzz, feazs, fuddle, rave, ravel, 
revel, 247 ; heron, egret, 248 ; pit' 
tanee, to founder, a mort, 249 ; brush' 
wood, 250 ; barracks, basket, navel, 
eant, choke, 251 ; coot, crane, kite, 
gully eonyger, crowd, corsair, 252 ; 
balderdash, vtnewed, mawkish, grate. 



gridiron, cradle, 256 ; gallanty vassal, 
gain, 256 ; gather y gravel, hoscy lasty 
257 ; maggoty mildeWy 258 ; mien, 
^^ggVi boby moby mop, pine, plead, 
pletty 259 ; plody sledy slot, spury 
worthy 260. 

Etymology, Greek and Latin, *78-74, 
299 ; Pott's researches, 3. 

■ of the word kingy '46-48, 

82 ; of the words poenus and <l>oivi(y 
1 89 ; of the word currier y 149 ; origin 
of the phrase to * * curry favour, " 150; 
words which sometimes take an n 
for their initial, umpirCy eyasy adder y 
151. The words stenchy piddle y 
carouse, beggar, hassock, \5'6 ; fttchet, 
pamper y whortleberries, 154 ; toad, 
fellow, tallow, m-e, spelly 155 ; gorCy 
barbican, jest, 156 ; banner, stifle, 
smother, 167 ; alight, 168 ; of cer- 
tain Latin words, 205 ; munes, 
nuBni; communi', immuni', muro-, 
ib, ; feria-y festO', festivo-, 206 ; 
detmno, 207 ; fas, fasto, fascia- , 
fasci', manifesto', ib, ; sohriO', 
ebrio', 208; laseivO', ib.: eastiga-re, 
castrO', 209; clamor, amor, instar, 
210 ; eja, celeberi', eremor, con' 
sterna-re, 211. 

of the words trap-rock, '42-4, 



12 ; summer, 92 ; funnel, 243 ; cobble, 
ib, ; bride, ib, ; haveny 244 ; of the 
names of places : Orkney, 9 ; Hams- 
gate, Kent, Canterbury, Winchester, 
Worcester, 10 ; Netley, Ambreebury, 
Charford, 11 ; Bakewell, 113 ; Man- 
chester, ib. ; Hastings, 117 ; Surrey, 
Normandy, 111 ; Norfolk, Suffolk, 
118; Wight, 65; of the gentile 
nouns : Engle, 106 ; Londreis, Sw- 
reis, Norreis, 114 ; Manx, 113 ; 
of the Romance names : Zondres, 
115; Flandrts, 116; of the Welsh 
names of districts : Ruim, Andred, 
Gwent, 10 ; Brynaiq, 12 ; of the 
Latin : Orcades, 9 ; Huiccii, Can- 
tuarenais, Wintonensis, 10; Vectis, 
65. 

Eugubine Tables, '62-3, 167. 

Euphonic initial Towel rejected by Prof. 
T. H. Key, '62-8, 29. 

Euphony: — in what it consists, '48- 
60, 261 ; letter-changes said to be 
euphonic, often the result of a con- 
Tention merely, ib, ; even when eu- 
phonic theydo not necessanly indicate 
any actual metamorphosis of a letter, 
ib. 

Euripides: — on the critical arrange- 
nient of the text of the Medea, '44- 



I. INPEX OF ATTTHOES AM1> SUBJECTS. 



23 



"ExaipideB [eontintted'} : 
46,21 ; Elmsley'scorrectionsof V. 318 
considered, ib. ; in t. 264 iyfifutro 
may perhaps be a corraption for 
iyelvarOf 22; the passage at verse 
216 noticed, 23 ; the parallel passage 
in Ennius an imitation ana not a 
translation of Euripides, ib. ; cor- 
rection suggested, 25 ; the passage 
at T. 529 considered, 26 ; the pas- 
sage at Y. 733, 27 ; reading adopted 
by Person, 28 ; correction suggested, 
29 ; the passage (Tro. 674) considered, 
218. 

Explore ; how the notion of exploring 
is got iromploro, '67, 129-134. 

f silent in Norman and English, '68-9, 
417. 

F in Latin always represented an older 

4>, X, e, '68, 16. 
fanaticsj introduction and deriyation of 

the word, '66, 218. 
fast J Early-English and Anglo-Saxon 
suffix, '62-8, 86. 

Father and Mother, appellations of, '68, 
36. 

, the names for them among 

various races are formed independ- 
ently by each race, '62-8, 188; for 
principal type for each name, pa, ta, 
ap, at, for father ; ma, na, am, an, 
for mother, 190; vocabularies illus- 
trating these, 197-204; the labial 
and dental p and t generally used for 
the father, the liquids m, n, for the 
mother, 190 ; exceptions to this, 
193; generally the labial (pa for 
father, ma for mother) is charac- 
teristic of the old world, and the 
dental (ta for father, na for mother) 
of the New, 191. 

Faulty rhymes in modem Poets, '77-9, 
6*; Chaucer, 11*. 

Faux monnoyeur, le, a title of Philippe 
le Bel, '68, 2. 

Fecit, old form of Latin perf., '62-8, 
183. 

Fergusson's Poems, quoted, '62-8, 96. 

Final consonants : — ^their origin later 
than that of the initial consonants, 
'48-60, 240; the Chinese "abrupt 
tone " represented in the later lan- 
guages by a final p, k, or t, ib ; 
reason of such substitution, 241 ; 
the final p permuted into b, p* or b% 
242 ; the final k into g, k* or g*, 261 ; 
the final k sometimes assimilated, ib, 

Finn verbs of gradual motion, '62-8, 
226. 



Finnish and Lappish, by Dr. O. 
. Donner, 77-9, 602. 
languages. See Verb, Poly- 
synthesis, etc., '48-60, 277. 

languages, Teutonic influ- 



ence, '78-4, 445. 

languages, their relationship 



with the Indo- Germanic family dis- 
puted by Dr. Lottner, '60-1, 129 ; 
maintained by Mr. Wedgwood, 
281. 

languages, their connexion 



with the Indo- Germanic, '66, 172-9 ; 
miscellaneous etymologies illustrated 
from, 179-89; affinity with Basque, 
216-8. 

tongues, connected with the 



Indo-European family, '44-6, 180; 
the inflexions of the preterite of the 
Lappish verb, 181 ; Lappish pro- 
nouns, personal and possessive, 182 : 
formation of the passive verb in 
Lappish, 183 ; the numerals, ib. ; 
ease-endings of nouns, t^. ; forma- 
tion of the superlative according 
to Indo-European analogies, 183 ; 
negative prefix of adjectives, 184 ; 
present tense of the Finnish verb, 
185 ; the gerund resembles the old 
Greek infinitive, i^. ; Finnish pro- 
nouns personal, demonstrative and 
interrogative, ib. ; Finnish numerals, 
186 ; the distributives, t^. ; certain 
Finnish words compared with their 
synonyms in different Indo-European 
languages, 187. 

Finno-Tartanan languages, pronouns 
in, '69, 45. 

Flagrare —fragrnre, a genuine form in 
Virgil, '67, 229. 

Flap or Flak, on words admitting of 
being grouped around this root, 
'62-8, 143-52, with a list of the 
hundred and twelve English words 
so to be grouped, 152. 

Flugel, no mean authority on outlying 
varieties of English, '62-8, 15. 

Force affecting speech sounds, '78-4, 
127. 

Forks = forks of finger, in King Lear, 
'67, 134. 

Formation of the Latin genitives cu.ju9, 
eJuM, hvju8, '48-60, 81 ; of the 
plural of the pronouns personal in 
the Tumali language, 80. 

■ of words from inflected cases, 

'46-8, 19; on the analysis of the 
present participle in the Indo-Euro- 
pean languages, ib. ; its ending in 
Sanscrit at, which in certain in- 




Fonnation of worda [eonlinued] : 
fleiione takes the form of unit, 20 ; 
I Simeont names form their 
Bblntive in at, and we may infer the 
eiiBtiince of an ancient ablative 
ending in al, ib. ; in mnnjr tan- 
gnagos Dbliqne cases ure Dsed as Bub- 
'■" ' a for tbepreaent participle, ib. 
on of the present periecl and 
fntuie tensea in Basque, ^4S-S, 20; 
of the Uun^aiian participle, 21 ; 
of the Lappish participle, 22 ; in 
ancient Sanscrit the Terhal root 
Bometimes gotemed cases, 23 ; the 
crude {nrm of the participle in com- 
position seems to discharge the duties 
of tbe inflected participle, ih. ; the 
Lithuanian indeclinable form in ant, 
corresponding' with the participlsa, 
24 ; the Lettish indeclinable tann 
in oht, ib. ; inference that these in- 
declinable forms were abtativcs. sub- 
sequentlf conTorted into injected 
participles, 35 ; and that conse- 
quently the present participle of tho 
eanscnt, Greek, etc., were fonned 
from an inflected case, ib. The in- 
corporations of elements signifying 
gender, number, and case are snffi- 
eiently obvious in some languages, 
but oDBCUTed in others, owing to 
euphonic changes, 27 : examples of 
participial and gerundial fonus in 
various languages, ih, 

Fminicare, genuine Latin word, 'S7, 
226. 

Fonnosa, language and dialects of, 
'77-9, 106. 

Fnuce and Bpain, on the ancient lan- 
gnages of, 6S, 165-84. 

Frencb, changes of the pronunciation 
in, between 14t)i and 16th centuries, 
'68-9, 427. 

accent, "73-4.138, 260 ; old 

teita, 437; philologr, 440; place 
of as a langaage, 4 ; Rhythm, tSS ; 
TOWel intensification, 143. 

- Patois, mossaries of, '6B-B, 



words knowledge, and aiedlork, 
'B2-B, 75 1 further rBroarliB ou the 
last Brllable in the words Anov- 
ledge and ictd/oek, '62-8, 33. 

— on a chronol(moal mistake 

in the preface of M. Genin, the 
editor of Palagrave, '87, 41 ; tech- 
nical terms lelating to the manu- 
facture of playing cards, 66 : on 
the sound of tlie initial Th iuEuglish, 
[he phrase " Scot ■ ■ - " 

on the reformation of English 
' '42-4, 216. 

word fAs.<,'fia, 151-4 
English dictionaries, espe 
cially one proposed by the late A. i 
A. Pry, 257-272 ; specimen of Mr. I 
A. A. Pry's etymological grouping, 
257-9. 

Fula classes of languages, '68, 121. 

Pnlgentias, worUdess as an authority, 
'68, 13. 

FumivaU, F. J.. Esq., rynaon's Con- 
tracts with Horman and Palsgrave, 
communicated by, '67, 362. 

notes by, on Herbert Cole- 
ridge, '60-1, 43, 299-3 

some fresh eyidi 

Becond Teit of Lajamon on the 
possesaiveB in ee and hie, adduced by, 
'B- -- ■■ 






the 



the 



357, * 

soft J 

Latin labiob, 87, B-29. 

Prequentatives, yerba, '62-G3, 213. 

FrequentatiTes, intensive bb well as 
diminnteve, '6T, 110. 

Fiiesic, the Old Friesic is above all 
Dthsrs the foM el iirigo of English 
'55, 284; 'SB, 196-^16: is much 
nearer to it than Modem German, — 
list of the three compared, '260 ; 
spoten ou the Elbe, 248 ; Old Friesic 



nominative, as a relative, before a. 

1627, 139. 

~ou Early English, '78-4, 235. 

on an unregistered sense "' 

the word thing and itB base thf, ' 

126-6. 
Future of Tjitin Verbs, how formed, 

'68, 309, etc. ' 

Futures in i,ini in Greek, as ^aXKitaa, 

TbnmTiTtf, MAonTfrai, are vulgar, 62-3, 

289. 

G, initial = e '62-3, 32. 

g or J, the French, soft, as representing 
Latin labials, Mr. Ludlow's paper ' 
on, '57, 9-29 ; the Latin and Greek, 
equivalents of, 22. 



I. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



25 



Oadhelic and Cymric, chief points of 
difference in the sounds of, *66, 
99. 

Gaelic representatiyes of the prefix ava, 
'64, 42. 

Gaidoz, Prof., on Celtic Philology, 
'78-4, 377. 

Galla language. See African language, 
'46-8, 125 ; on coincidences between, 
and different European languages, by 
H. Wedgwood, '69, 78-82. 

Gallatin's Essays on American Philo- 
logy, a supplement to, '68, 67-115. 

Gall^e, Dr. J. H., on Dutch, 1876-7, 
'77-9, 16. 

Gallow, as used in Shakspere's Lear, 
'68, 123, 197. 

Garnett (Rev. Richard), on the forma- 
tion of words by the further modifi- 
cation of inflected cases, '46-8, 9, 
19 ; on certain initial letter- changes 
in the Indo-European languages, 
111 ; on the nature and analysis of 
the verb, 169, 183, 213. 

• on the languages and dialects 

of the British Islands, '44-6, 15, 
77 ; on the origin and import of the 
genitive case, 165 ; on the deriva- 
tion of words from pronominal and 
prepositional roots, 205 ; on certain 
initial changes in the Indo-European 
languages, 233, 267 ; on the relative 
import of language, 275. 

on the language and dialects 



of the British Island, '42-4, 91 ; 
same subject continued, 144, 169, 
263; on the probable relations of 
the Picts and Gaels with the other 
tribes of Great Britain, 119 ; on the 
origin and import of the augment in 
Sanscrit and Greek, 265. 

on the nature and analysis 



of the verb, '48-60, 15, 95, 165, 
173, 233. 
his researches on Northum- 



brian dialect, '62-8, 233. 
Gaulish inscriptions, inferences from, 

'66, 98. 
■ names, on, '66, 97 ; races, 

on the, ih. 
Gawaine, Sir, quoted, '62-8, 46;>., 93, 

98 sq., 106. 
Gellius, quoted, '62-8, 21. 
Geloni, the, of the Scvthia of Hero- 
dotus, were the Alani, '64, 112. 
gen or keuj on the meaning of the root, 

'66, 207-9 ; genitives in oo in 

Greek, 147. 
Gender in the Teutonic languages, 

Mr. H. Sweet, '77-9, XI* 



Generamen, genuine form in Virgil, '67, 
232. 

Genitive case: its origin and import, 
'44-6, 166; Schlegel's theory with 
respect to the case-endings, ib, ; 
Bopp ^regards them as pronouns or 
pronominal roots, 166 ; the Sanscrit 
genitival ending «^a, probably the 
same word as the Vedic pronoun at/a, 
ib. ; modes of expressing the geni- 
tival relation in the Shemitic lan- 
fuages, ib. ; the Samaritan d, 
Ithiopic zoy and the Amharic pa, 
at the same time relative pronouns 
and signs of the genitive, 167 ; the 
sign of the genitive and the relative 
pronoun resemble each other in the 
Coptic, t^. ; and are identical in the 
Galla and the Yoruba, 168 ; the sign 
of the genitive agrees with the 
relative or demonstrative pronoun in 
many of. the Polynesian languages, 
ib. ; in ceHain Indian dialects the 
genitive ends in Ara, A;/, or ke, ac- 
cording tothegender of the governing 
noun, 169 ; the possessive adjective 
of the Slavonic and the definite 
adjective of the Lithuanian and 
Gothic probably formed by affix- 
ing a demonstiitive pronoun, ib. ; 
the Syriac, Ethiopic, etc., prefix a 
relative, ib. ; in the Afghan the 
genitival prefix da a demonstrative 
pronoun, 170 ; sign of the genitive 
identical with the relative in the 
Tartarian dialects, Chinese, etc., 171 ; 
constructions of the Semitic, 172; 
of the Albanian, Persian, and 
Pehlevi, tb. ; the genitive establishes 
the same relation between words that 
the relative does between clauses, ib. ; 
examples of the different construc- 
tions above noticed, 173. 

Genitive formation, '62-8, 156. 

Gentile nouns used as names of districts, 
'42-4, 103. 

Gepidse, on the nation of, by Dr. R. 
G. I-Atham, '67, 1-9. 

German, accent in, '78-4, 133 ; intona- 
tion, 133 ; Philology, 441 ; vowel 
intensification, 286. 

representatives of the prefix 

ova, '64, 50, 61, etc., 57. 

classical scholars, English 



debt to, '62-8, 113. 

tribes in Gaul, '60-2, 13; 



their names and extent, 14-20 ; the 
date of their immigration, 21. 
Gipsv language, Mr. C. C. Leland, 



ipsy language, 
^77-9, XilL 



INDEX TO PROC. AWD TRAWB. THILOLOG. BOO, 18+2-7B. 



ffipsj language, "To give tho mcTc,'' 
mottnill^ of the pirase, '8B-8, flO. 

01, gr, initul, often interchanged srith 
Bl, Or, 'M, 7. 

GlanlTilk (Trsvisa'a transl.J, ■fiS-S, 
106, 1117. 

Glaagetion, quoted, 'B2-3, 6S. 

Glide sounds, '73-4, 120. 

Glottal Towel change, '73-4, 469. 

Gliick'a " Celtic names in Ctesar," 
reviewed, '67, 300. 

7AVKV1, 7\aiiiia;, on the derivation of, 
by Th. Aufreuht, '69, 14. 

pn and li liquid, unknonn in Norman 
and English, 'SB-S. 413. 

go-, on Terbl irith this meaning in ttie 
Indo-European family, from the root 
mit, mtt, hit, lut, pel, el, it. In, aw, 
<"'i P^t '< '< waiid, and, ta2, teal, 
pi\, call, gall, all, gek, ga, ped, toS 
arvar, etc., 'SB, 1-15. 

ffo, Sanskrit verba deuoting, 62-3, 120, 
«??■ 

ffi bei, words derived from the cry, 'SB, 



le phrase. 



Godeave the King, origin of 1 

'S2-8, S-ID. 
Golagios and Gawaine (Boroanco) 

quoted, 03-3, 93. 
GotDariicKKB, Th., on the derivaliiin 

of the noun Attic, '5*, 96 ; on jecvr, 

f^rap. Ski. tjakrit, ileniis, eicup. Str. 

mkrit ; and Home wanla of kindred 

formatioD, 157-168. 

remarks on -ii'nj,'6B-3, 113; 

on Panini's antiquity, '68-3, 

lis. 

good and ienua, on the relation between 

the words, '59, 14B. 
Gothic, neuteiB in -to, '6S-3, 8. 
Gothic preliz <md- or eiidii-, its o^giit, 

mearuuff, and equivalents, in the 

Teutonic languages, '94 44, et«. ; 

niHTc-. 6S ; «/-, 62. 
Gouge, Cammentary on Hebrews, '6S-3 , 

90. 
Grammar, meaning of the term, '6S-3, 

233, itj. 
Grammor and dialect of West Somerset, 

Mr. F. T. Elwnrthy. '77-9, 143. 
Grammarians, the Latin, valae of their 

authority questioned, 'S8-9, 331-5. 
Grammars of modem languages, why 

seldom good, '67, 109. 
Graal, on the etvmology of, '64, 117- 

119, 120-124, 'lS4-l:iD. 
Greek, the change of h and d in, 'S9, 



Greek, see connecting vowela, in- 
finitive, '68-3, 297 ; optative, 207 
and N"^ : short vowels, a, t, a, closely 
related, 299; perfect, in b, 301 aq ; 
imper. sor. 302 sq. ; 3rd peis. plur. 
301; accua. eing. 307; aucns. plur. 
308 ; dat. plur. 308 sq. ; Diptotfis, 
3 1 ; nouna of 1st and 2nd and aUo 
3rddecl. 310 6qq.; pf. part. act. 314 ; 
1. Aor. 154. 302 sq. 

^ pronnneiation of, 73-4, '156 ; 

167, 386 ; philology, 441 ; rSsearchea 
in, 226 ; vowel change, 308 ; vowel 
iutenaieeation, 287. 

accentuation in the Homeric, 

age, 'Se, 63. 

adjectivts in on- and ay-. 



Futures and Aorials, forma- 
tion of, '67, 1 ; (mediicval) general 
confusion of cases in, 87. 

accents an anachronism when 

fljiplled to the writings of Homer, 
^schylus, Thucydides, Aristophanes, 
etc.. '85, 120. 

language, see j 

Euripides. Derivation, eb 
applicatioa of Homeric terma bv 
Attic writers, '48, 67 ; of the worfi 
rfi>Bi\vfiras by Ariatopbauea, 59 ; 
ita real meaning, 60; use of iuinniAn 
by JEscbjlna [Eum. 789). 64 ; the 
word probably formed on a false 
analogy, li. ; uhj of ticBTi by .^Ischylus, 
Euripides, etc., 66 : of itrnn by 
.^schyluB, 66 ; Mr. Linwood's inter- 
pretation of liniTi, ii. ; «|\mnii 
{(Ed. Col. 349) probably written for 



lachylufl, 






87; 






synonym of 1 ^ ^ 

1468). 267; m>e of Af" instead of 
the middle form iCB/iai (CBd. Col. 
134), 269 ; use of a<bfuu ((Ed. Tyr. 
157), peculiar, 270; iKapa used 'by 
.dilschyluB as though it were the plural 
of tkKf. 272 ; the Homeric (kxp«. 
271 : the use of -pas in the eensa of 
husband not Homeric, 273; in neuters 
of the third declension the vowel of 
the final syQable of the crude noun 
is short, 272 ; some apparent ei- 
ceptions produced bv contiaction, ii. ; 
other eiceptioaa proDably Attic forms ; 
the exception imus, ffTgJ.ros con- 
aidered. i«. 

language. See Etymology :— 

Fragmenta of 07-'' — "~ ■"*"" 



i 



I. INDEX OF ATTTHOKS AND SUBJECTS. 



27 



Greek language [continmd'] : — 
and defence of Demosthenes, respect- 
ing the money of Harpalus, '48-50, 
39 ; probably written by an Alex- 
andrian under the Ptolemies, ib, ; 
translation, 43. 

language : — on the construc- 
tion of Hnw^/x^ with a past indicative, 
*46-8, 17. See Etymology, Hermes, 
etc. 

language. See Augment, 



Csesura, Herodotus, Plato: — Greek 
inscription found in Corfu, '42-4, 
149 ; apparently as old as the time 
of Pisistratus, 160 ; contains the 
three characters H ^» ib. ; read 
throughout from right to left, ib, ; 
OlavBioi treated as a trisyllable, t^. ; 
vpS^fuFos for 7rp6^€vost 151 ; i in 
TKaaias made long, ib. ; trotrfidni for 
irrovfiffaroj ib. On the construction 
of 7i/a, Zvws, fis with the past in- 
dicative, 227 ; Dt. Monk's interpre- 
tation of this syntax, t^. ; another 
proposed, 228; various examples in 
which this syntax occurs, 230. 

lyrical metres, the Dorian, 



Sapphic, etc., shown to be only 
modifications of the old Dactyliic 
Hexameter, '64, 10-26. 

poetry (modem) in rhyme, 



specimen of, '56, 142-5 ; Greek nouns 
of the second declension, on the un- 
contracted form of the genitive case 
singular of, by Prof. Maiden, '55, 146, 
164. 

words occurring in Latin 



authors, mode of writing them dis- 
cussed, '60-1, 178. 

Greenlandish forms for I and thoUy '59, 
65. 

Grimm quoted, '62-8, 3, 7, 9, 10, 16. 

Grimm (J.), his Canons or the laws of 
letter-change propounded by him, 
examined, '48-50, 239. 

his mistakes as to the 4is- 

, carding of the plural ending asj in 
the case of nouns belonging to " the 
first strong declension," '44-6, 70 ; 
in the case of nouns ending in els, 
72. 

law, remarks on, by Mr. H. 



Sweet, '68-9, 277. 

law in South Africa, '78-4, 



186; Peile and Whitney on, 326. 
Grosseteste's " Castle oi Love," R. 

F. Weymouth on, '62-8, 48. 
Grotefend, his criticisms on the Lycian 

inscriptions considered, '42-4, 'l94, 

201. 



Groveling and Grovelling, R. Morris 

on, '62-8, 85. 
Gryech, his arrangement of the Russian 

verbs, '42-4, 97. 
Ou-y on (the Romance prefix), '66, 

110. 
Guernsey, M. Metivier engaged upon 

the dialect of , '68, 123. 
Guest (E.), on certain Welsh names of 

places preserved in English com- 

Sounds, '42-4, 9 ; on certain in- 
exions of the Old-English adjec- 
tive, 65 ; on English gentile nouns, 
and more particularly on their 
secondary use as names of places, 

, 103 ; on English pronouns indeter- 
minate, 151 ; on the ellipsis and on 
the pleonastic use of the pronoun 
personal in English syntax, 217 ; 
on the use of the dative in English 
syntax, 251 ; on English pronoun, 
personal, 277. 

on the elements of languages 

their arrangement and their acci- 
dents, '48-50, 239, 261. 

on the ellipsis of the verb in 



English syntax, '44-6, 6; on the 
use of the collective noun in English 
syntax, 69 ; on the anomalous verbs 
of the English language, 189 ; 
on English verbs, substantive and 
auxiliary, 223 ; on the ordinary in- 
flexions of the English verb, 241. 

on the etymolojry of the word 



Stone-henge, '52-3, 31-5. 

on orthographical expe- 



dients, '46-8, 1 ; on the elements of 
language, their arrangement and 
their accidents, 31, 71, 187 ; on the 
transformation of the labials, 165. 
on the roots of language, 



their arrangement and their acci- 
dents, '50-2, 41-50 ; on the origin of 
certain Anglo-Saxon idioms, 71-3 ; 
on a curious Tmesis, which is some- 
times met with in Anglo-Saxon and 
Early English syntax, 97-101 ; on 
certain foreign terms, adopted by 
by our ancestors prior to their settle- 
ment in the British Islands : hoer- 
fest (harvest), peru (a pear), mor- 
beam (a mulberry-tree), cyrs-treow 
(a cherry-tree), pysa (a pea), cawl 
(colewort), noepe (a turmp), er-ian 
(to ear), 169-174 ; tigle (a tile, 
brick), duru (a door), kebar (a 
rafter), castel (a fortress), ceaster 
(a city), porth (a gate), weall (a wall 
of defence), stroete (a roadj, mylen 
(a mill), cycene (a kitohen), cyWe 



penig {a ^nnjl, 185-9. 
hie asBertdon that no traceB 

uf DuDuh are to be foond ia our 

MSS. ur tUulects, ooutrutected, '69, 

28. 
Hiatory 6£ En^iah metcea, 

'T3-4, 624, 625, 645. 
■fuifl, the crude furm and cstses of, 

'63-8, 159, 177- 
OnsNEY, Anha, list of * Noifblk 

words ' coUeoted hj, '66, 29-39. 
Gnttuial actions, on words deacriptit 



Gntturak, apt to vanish before d in 
Greet, '62-3, 15 r often changed to 
Bibilante, 24 ; between voweU become 
I/. 219; akin to Kriu Greek, 2S3Bq. 

final, disappear, '68, 297, 

Owaranl kngwa^, '64, 229-31 ; race, 



S, TaluBof, '73-4, 331. 

Hautduyt, quoted, '62-3, 102. 

Hall, Biehop, his use of durklings, 
'83-3, lUl sq. 

Eampole, quoted, '69-3, 44. 

Haxsok (a. "W.), communication re- 
specting the Yei aud Meadi dialeots, 
U'-60, 135. 

Harrington's Ariotita, quoted, '62-3, 
163. 

Hanf B Gothic, one-handed, Prof. Key 
on, '69, HO- 

DAwniEY (Itev. Dr.), on a Gieek 
inscription lately found in Corfu, 
'4».4, 149. 

Hebrew abounds in compounds, '6S, 
H3 ; preliieB. Hi aqq. ; roota often 
illuatrated by Anglo-Saxon, 67 ; tri- 
eousouantal atema in, not elemental, 
63 ; their formation, 6S. 

on the eiiatence of hicon- 

Bonantal prefixee of coDipoaition. in, 
by Rev, V. Crawford, '68, 63. 

' future ' or ' imporfoct ' bi- 

plained aa a ' preaent.' '67, 10. 

— language : — on tlie connexioa 

which exists between the Hebrew 
aud the languages allied to the 
Sanscrit, '48-60, 122; ikUsr, 'he 
apoke,' may perhaps be coanected 
with the German treiheti, ih. ; 
perforate,' with the 



etc.. ib. : haf, ' the hollow of thB 
hand,' with the Latin c 
Welsh eipiaa, A. ; tiAtar, 'with 
KijiitDi, id. : liippor, ' a BBorTow,' 
niih. the German sperling and Euelish 
a/iarraur, 1 24 ; aooil, with the Ger- 
man neden and Engliab to leethti 
ih. : madiid, ' be measured,' with the I 
La^u uutiBT, etc., ib. [ 

Hebrew, structure of its worda, its ] 
roota monostllabiG, '64, 174, eta^ J 
249, etc. ; old notions about it, 238 ; 1 
its pronouns compared with otlUT J 
Senatii: ones, 243, etc. ' 

Hengiat, his fate, '67, 81, 

Henry VIIL, his only English pro- 
clamatioa, Oct. 18th, 1258, '6B-tlL 
1-135 ; text of it, 19-23 ; ^oasanaf 
index to it, 108-27. 

Qenxen. G.,on the inncriptionof Sors, 
'62-3, 179-87, 

Herbart'a (Mr.) derivation of StouB- 
henge from Stone = Heugest dis- 
puted, '62-8, 31-35. 

Hercules, custom of offering tenths to, 
'62-8, 181, etc. 

Here and there in Chaucer, by Dr. K. 
F. Weymouth, '77-9, I. 1«, 

Hermes: origin of the name, '46-8, 



Hen 



the 



Enir'i 



to break,' witii the German brechtn. 



. . - a 

dwellings, the god of sleep, etc., 
and the deity presiding oyer flocks 
and herds, ib. ; 'Ep^^mf coincides 
with Sarameja, a patrooyraio of 
Sarama, who in the Sanscrit Yedoi 1 
appears as the canine messenger of' I 
the gods, 202 ; Silrameya ad^egsed T 
in one of the hymna of the Itigveda, I 
203 ; several of the attribntea ot ] 
Hermea assigned to Mm, ii. 
Herodotus ; in the year b,( 

Herodotus must have been at AtbeUB 
or Samoa, '«a-4, 161 ; waa in Athens 
after the year s.o. 437, 162 ; joined I 
the great Grecian settlement at ' 
Thuni,)^.; probably became ^iirauiol 
of Athens after the siege of Samoi, 
and as such iiiioiKat went tu Thnrii, 
162 ; was well acquainted with thft ] 
works of Sophoales, 163 ; pasaaj ' 
the Antigone imitated, 164 ; 
saying of Salon perhaps taken from. 
the (Ed. Tyrannus, ih. ; other imitA- 
tions of Sophocles, 165 ; Lyaias and 
Xenophon imitators of Herodotus, 
ib. ; HerodotuB seema to have ar- 
ranged and in part compiled Ids 
hL'rt«ry at Thurii, 166 ; more espe- 
cially for Athenians and from 
AUieniau authorities, ib. The pas- 



k 



I. INDEX OF AOTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



29 



Herodotus [continuedl : — 
sage 1, vii. ircus vaph irarphs 4x9^x6* 
jjifyoi tV ^X^^'i considered, 275. 

true view of his account of 

the Battle of Marathon, '54, 9; 
his Agathyrsi were Turks, 111 ; 
his account of Darius estimated, 
'62-8, 17 ; his account of the 
Battle of Salamis examined and 
compared with -^schylus's, etc., 
101-16. 

Heroic Verse (English), the pedigree 
of, from the Greek lamhic Trime- 
ter, '67, 43. 

Hesiod, quoted, '62-8, 312. 

Heterographers, English, chronologi- 
cal list of some, '66, 56 ; notes on 
the same, 1 3. 

Hettbma (de Haan), Archaic and 
Provincial English words compared 
with Dutch and Friesic, '68, 143. 

Hints on the 

Thesis '* The Old Friesic above all 
others the fons et origo of the Old 
English," '66, 196-216. 

Hexameters, English, C. B. Cayley 
on, '62-68, 67 ; causes of tneir 
failure, '60-1, ' 52 ; dactjrlic, re- 
marks on, '78-4, 48 ; Virgil's, ac- 
cent in, 36. 

Heywood, quoted, '62-8, 104. 

Hieromnemon, the duration of his 
office, '62-8, 68. 

Himyaritic inscriptions, '78-4, 371. 

hin of G. hin-geheiif etc., corre- 
sponds to the Latin in-de or fan-c^ 
'66, 8. 

Hippias, his tactics before the Battle 
of Marathon, '64, 3, 6. 

Hoc luciscit — * see, see, it is getting 
Uffht,' '62-8, 124. 

Hodgson (W. B.), on the Kissour, 
Sungai, and Timbuctfi vocabularies 
of the Timbuctfi language, '60-2, 
73-6. 

HoUand, philology in, '78-4, 442. 

Amm. M 



arc. quoted, '62-8, in 



90, 99. 

Hollinshed, quoted, '62-8, 106. 
holus, general spelling of ofusj '67, 231. 
Homer, quoted, '62-8, 21, 26, 81, 

308, 309, 310, 312. 
, Yates on the irregularities of 

his versification, '66. 119. 
Homeric words, used by later writers 

in new senses, instances of, '60-1, 

271. 
Homilies, metrical, '62-8, 44 n. 1. 
Homonyms, effects of in French^ '66 

104. 



Honduras and San Salvador, lan- 
guages of '66, 109. 

'hood, English suffix, '62-8, 87k. 

Horace, quoted, '62-8, 213. 

nis law of accents, '68-9, 

319. 

Ode i. 16, Ode iii. 6, v. 16, 

24 ; authenticity of questioned, '67, 
219. 

Honssa language, not related to the 
Semitic, '60-1, 24. 

HowsB (J.), Vocabularies of certain 
North- American languages, '48-60, 
102, 191. 

Hiibschmann (Prof.), on Armenian, 
1876-7, '77-9, 64 ; », pronunciation 
of, in English, 23* ; in Latin and 
Greek, 32*. 

Humboldt (W.), his view of the 
verbal construction in Tagalfi. and 
Malagassy examined, '48-60, 99 ; 
of the verbal construction in Maya, 
166. 

Hungarian, on its verbal affixes, '69, 
97-116; and its nominal affixes, 
116-124, by F. Pulsky, Esq. ; far 
richer in verbal affixes than any of 
the Arian languages, 100. 

Hungarian language, on the recent 
history of (its great increase, the 
manufacture of words in, etc.), '66, 
285-310 ; has only the same word 
o for * he,' * she,' and * it,' 306 ; 
Hungarian pre-eminently a com- 
pound language, 299 ; language, 
^78-4, 216; ¥. Pulszky on, '68, 
21 ; history of the language, 33 ; 
its class among languages, 21 sq. ; 
adjectives have a superlative degree, 
28 ; adverbs, 30 ; article, only one, 
and that definite, 27 ; cases in, 26 ; 
conjugation, two forms of, 29 ; da- 
tive and genitive have same termina- 
tion, 26 ; declension, scheme of, 27 ; 
double consonant never begins word 
in, 28 ; feminine and neuter unknown 
27 ; harmony of vowels 



in. 



what, 22 ; excludes some foreign 
words, ib. ; history of the language, 
33 ; innovations and neologism m, 
33 sqq. ; order of words in, 31 ; 
personal pronouns, elements of, 
identical in Hungarian and Arian 
languages, 26 ; plural not used 
after numerals, etc., 31 ; possessive, 
absolute, i.e,, treated as a new word, 
26 ; possessive personal affixes, ex- 
tensively used in, 23 sqq. ; prepo- 
sitions are postpositions in, 24, 30 ; 
roots unconnected with Arian Ian- 



30 INDEX TO PROC. AND TRANS. PHILOLOG. SOC. 1842-79. 



Hungarian langoage [continued'^ : — 
guages, 32; verbs form four se- 
condary roots, 28; the two forms 
of conjugation, 29; verb *to be' 
has no third person present, exist- 
ence being implied in the subject, 
30. 

I final, quantity of in mihi, tibif sibi, 
in Plautus, '67, 403 ; t, Northum- 
brian preposition, not an abbrevia- 
tion of illy 2 Ap. 2 Pt. p. 7 ; in 
African language, '59, 36-7 ; / and 
?iere connected, 62. 

J, Norman and English, *68-9, 37 1 -2 ; 
if passing into, '62-8, 297^. 

'ica, Latin frequentatives in, '62-8, 
213. 

Icelandic, incidental notes on, '78-4, 
96, 97, 109 ; philology, 443 ; pho- 
netic changes, 477, 505, 506 ; vowel 
change, 313. 

texts published, '77-9, 34. 

use ot the reflexive pro- 
noun, '66, 80. 

ie, ye, Norman and English, '68-9, 
394. 

Ignordj meaning and derivation of, 
'64, 41, 43. 

Iguvian Tables, on two passages of 
the, by Th. Aufrecht, '68, 17. 

'Uly the Icelandic, terminations dis- 
cussed, '67, 113. 

Imaginary roots, the mischief of 
putting them into grammars, '64, 
201. 

Inheritance, law of, amongst prime- 
val Celts and Teutons, '67, 281. 

Initial consonants, their origin earlier 
than that of the final consonants, 
'48-60, 240. 

guttural, tendency of to disap- 
pear, ^67, 385. 

letters : the initial ft, r , modi- 



fications of a more complex sound, 
>46-8^ 111 ; the Northumberland 
burr, ib. ; pronunciation of the 
Arabic ghain, 112 ; the aspirated 
r in Greek and Welsh often repre- 
sents kr, gr, 113; the Welsh rAew; 
may represent Kpvosy 113 ; the initial 
r unknown to the Turkish and Tar- 
tarian dialects, 114 ; examples to 
flldstrate the preceding statements, 
ib., tee Letter-changes. 

Utkling, its derivation, '67, 115, 116. 

Xonovations in Hungarian, '68, 33, 
aqq. 

Xnsects, on the vernacular names of, 
' ^-. E. Adams, '69, 84-96. 



'ion, list of Latin words in, '69, 273- 
6 ; meaning and origin of, 276, etc. 
Inta languages, '68, 110. 
m^r is a comparative of t« *up,' '64, 

- 68. 

Interchange of b and m in Eastern 
languages, '68, 77 ; of initial bl 
and gly br and //r, 7 ; of rf and /, 
39 ; final d and /, medial d and 
«, 8. 

Interjections in West Somerset dia- 
lect,. '77-9, 237. 

interpolare^ meaning and derivation 
of, '64, 66. 

interrogarey meaning and derivation 
of, '64, 67. 

Intonation in spoken Swedish, '77-9, 
495 ; English, '78-4, 128 ; German, 
133; Itaiiau, 134. 

-w, -eoy etc., Latin, degraded forms of 
-essOy -escoy etc., '67, 17. 

Ireland, the first inhabitants of, '66, 
179. 

specimen of the dialects 

spoken in the Barony of Forth, 
in the county of Wexford, '48-60, 
101; the 'Welshmen* whose de- 
scendants use it must have come 
from the English settlements in 
Gower and Pembroke, 102. 

Irish Glosses, from MSS. in Trin. 
CoU., Dublin, of the end of the 
14th and first half of the 15th 
centuries, '69, 168-215. 

Language. See Celtic languages. 

representatives of the prefix 

way '64, 43. 

Isbister (J. A.), on a short vocabu- 
lary of the Loucheux language, 
'48-60, 184. 

-t«m, horrid compounds in, '68, 50. 

it (3rd Sing. Perf.), in Plautus, '67, 
403. 

'ittty Latin frequentatives in, '62-8, 
214. 

Italian accent, '78-4, 134 ; rhythm, 
135 ; vowel intensification, 289. 

Italian Dialects, by Prof. Kajna, 
'77-9, 587. 

it8y not in the first Authorized Ver- 
sion of the Bible, '62-8, lu ; or in 
Shakspere, 11. 

Imperfect Tense, use of, in legal 
Latin, '67, 6. 

Imperfects in Greek not unfrequentiy 
employed as Aorists, 6. 

in and on closely related, '64, 90 ; the 
root of in, 95. 

India, Non -Aryan Languages of, by 
Mr. E. L. Brandreth,^77-9, ii. 



I. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



81 



Indicative and Subjunctive, connect- 
ing vowel short in both, in early 
Greek, '62-8, 298. 

Indo-European languages; I and 
thrm in the, '48-50, 25-30 ; in the 
Welsh the verbal endings are 
identical with the prepositional 
forms of the pronouns, 1 74 ; all 
these endings, out two, correspond 
with the verbal endings in the 
Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, etc., 175 ; 
the verbal forms in Irish partly 
synthetic, partly analytic, ib, ; 
Welsh and Irish preterites, t^. ; 
bhary the Irish ending of the second 
personal plural, the same as the 
Sanskrit bhar, veatrum? 176; 
Latin primitive verbs may, in many 
cases, by aid of the Welsh, be 
shown to be derived from nouns, 
ib ; in the Sanskrit also of the 
Vedas the d^atu or verbal root is 
often treated as a nomen actionis, 
177 ; the supposed occulta vis of 
the verb, 179 ; if, according to 
Pictet, the causative verb in the 
Celtic answers to the causative verb 
in Sanskrit, the latter must have 
an adjective for its base, 180 ; 
causative verbs very commonly 
formed from adjectives in Greek, 
Latin, German, and" Lithuanian, 
181 ; definition of a verb, according 
to its essential characteristics, 182. 

words compared with 

a list of Semitic roots and words, 
'64, 251-268 ; comparison of the 
names of common things in the 
Semitic and Indo-European lan- 
guages, 270-281. 

Indo-Chinese and Indian Archipelago 
Languages, by Mr. K. N. Oust 
'77-9, 72 ; Andaman Islands, 87 
Annam, 85 ; Arracan, 73 ; Borneo 
101 ; Burmah, 74 ; Cambodia, 82 
Celebes, 102; Cochin-China, 85 
Formosa, 105 ; Java, 95 ; Kakhyen 
78; Karen, 76; Khyeng, 74 
Laccadive Islands, 89 ; Madagas- 
car, 106 ; Malay, 90 ; Maldive 
Islands, 88; Nicobar Islands, 87; 
Pegu, 74 ; Philippine Islands, 104 ; 
Polynesia, 89 ; Shan, 80 ; Siam, 
82 ; Sumatra, 99 ; Tavoyee, 76. 

Infinitive, Greek, '62-8, 296 sq. 

Infinitives in -ew, — to helpen^ halden, 
explained, '56, 283. 

Inflexions, absent in Malagasy lan- 
guage, '77-9, 292; in spoken 
BwediBh substantives, 497. 



'ingf, the Anglo- Saxon termination, 
meaning of, ^50-2, 71 ; 48-50, 1. 

English suffix, of. abstract nouns, 

'62-8, 231 ; Old English adverbs 
in, 97. 

'inga, A.-S. suffix, '62-8, 94 ; -ifigen^ 
Mid. H. Germ, suffix, 94 ; 'inghe, 
Mid-Duteh suffix, 94 ; 'ingun, O. 
H. Germ, suffix, 93 sq. 

j^{dzh) in Norman and English, 
'68-9, 422. 

jag, dagy tacky stocky gag, kag, akag,^ 
shagy on words derived from these 
syUables, '66, 17-28. 

Jamieson (J.), his derivation of the 
word lee-shore considered, '44-6, 278. 

Japanese language, report on, 1876-7, 
by Prof. L. de Rosny, '77-9, 109 ; 
books on, published in Holland, 111 ; 
Austria, 112; France, 113; Italy, 
115 ; England, 116 ; America, 117 ; 
Switzerland, 117; relationship of, 
to Korean, 616. 

Japydes, or Japodes, identified with 
the GepidBB, '57, 2-6. 

Javanese language and its divisions, 
'77-9, 95 ; Dictionaries and Gram- 
mars, 97; character and history of, 
97. 

jecuvy riTrapy Skr. yakrtty on the 
derivation of, '64, 157. 

Jenner, H., on Cornish language, 
'78-4, 165. 

Johnson, his derivation of spider: 
spg-dor, the insect that watehes the 
dor (beetle), '69, 219 ; notice of 
his Dictionary, 1747, 263, 266. 

Joinrille, M. de Wailly's edition of, 
'78-4, 426. 

Jones's 'English Orthography' re- 
viewed, '67, 315. 

Jordan's Sallust reviewed, '67, 241. 

Jourdain, W. C, some proposed emen- 
dations in the text of Skakspere, and 
explanations of his words, '60-1, 133. 

on an unexplained passage 

in Shakspere's * King Lear,' '57, 
134-6. 

Judith, MS. of. Cotton. Yitellius A. 
XV., '68-9, 282. 

Junius on groveling, ete., '62-8, 88, 
91. 

k sound interchangeable with/? sound, 

'67, 384. 
k and t, interchanged, '62-8, 228 ; 

ch (kirk = church), 24 ; or c in West 

Europe = palatal « in Sanskrit, 122, 

127. 



32 IKDEX TO PROC. AND TBANS. PHILOLOG. SOC. 1842-79. 



Kafir laoguige, *73-4, 194. 

Kakhvens, language of the, '77-9, 78. 

Kamifaroi language of Aostralia, W. 
Bidley on^ '66, 72-84 ; named from 
the negative, 73 ; two nominatiTes, 
no plural form, 74 ; numerous in- 
flexions of Terbs, 76 ; list of nouns, 
77-80; adjectives, 80, 81; verbs, 
81, 82 ; no degrees of comparison, 
82 ; system of caste, 83. 

Karens, subdivisions and dialects of 
the, '77-9, 76. 

KopKoipfiPy of identical roots with 
tremere, craMdre, querquera, eortU' 
eu8, '67, 16. 

Kazinczy, his translations and writ- 
ings, ^55, 288, 289, 307, 309 ; his 
manufacture of Hungarian words, 
289-293, 296-302; his equivalent 
for churchgoingest, 293-296; his 
opponents, 299, 300. 

Kticoir^y, proposed reading for iccico- 
irdi in Homer, *66, 179. 

Kelts in France (Kymry) and Eng- 
land, '65, 163-166 ; in Spain, 173- 
180 ; of the Gaels and Kymry, 16-5, 
166 ; meaning of Gael and Kelt, 
1 66 ; of Mormi, Armorica, Vergo- 
bretus, Soldurii, 167 ; Ambacti, 
168 ; Lugdunum, 170 ; Novidunum, 
171, Ogimus, Taranis, Alauda, 171 ; 
Alemanni Belgae, 172 ; -tan, or 
-tewwr, 176; bee, 176; Scot, 178; 
Iberi, 178 ; Basque, Bayona, 182. 

Keltic, its connexion with Teutonic 
languages, and especially the Anglo- 
Saxon, '67, 39-92; Keltic and 
Teutonic words related, lists of, 
61-60, 63-76; Keltic races in 
England, amalgamated with the 
Saxon, 84 ; names of places in 
England, 91. 

■ languages, traces of the 

Italic Imperfect in, by Dr. C. Lott- 
ner, '69, 31-4. 

races in Britain at the Roman 



invasion, '65, 211-218 ; after the 
An^lo-Saxon conquest, 218, 242 ; 
social position and habits of, 243-4, 
280; words in common use, 211; 
names of natural objects and places 
in the dialect of Lancashire, 226- 
242. 

Kemble (J. M.), on a peculiar use of 
the Anglo-Saxon patronymical ter- 
mination inff, '48-50, 1. 

on the North Anglian dialect, 

44-6, 119, 131. 

a few Surrey provincialisms, 



Kennedy (James), on some aflinitifs 
in the Basque language with woxds 
referred to the Finnish and Indo- 
Gennanic languages, '56, 216-218. 

^—^ on the ancient languages of 
France and Spain, '55, 155-184. 

Khyeng or Hion langfuage, '77-9, 
74. 

Kiepert, referred to, '68, 140. 

Kis^udy, Alexander, '55, 304; his 
' Himfy,' 305 ; subsequent writings 
and pursuits, 306, 307. 

Kidaludy, Charles, '55, 307; Ka- 
zinczy's influence on him, 308. 

Kis^language, '58, 112 sq. 

Key (Prof. T. Hewitt), Daughter and 
Fille, are they connected ? '66, 1 ; 
on the Latin words tenure and 
temerarey 25 ; on the Latin pre- 
positions re and pro, their origin 
and primitive meaning, 30 ; the 
Latin et, que, atque (Ac.) and the 
Greek jtoi-re, all of one origin, 49. 

Miscellaneous re- 
marks suggested by Bitschl's Plau- 
tus, especially on the formation of 
the Latin Perfect, '60-1, 172. 

on the so-called 



aprivativum, '66, 62. 

on accent and 



metre, '78-4, 35 ; on Si, *' So,'' 52. 

on altera and 



/its analogues, '62-8,1; on words 
denoting * waterfowl ' and * swim- 
ming,' 14 ; on ^ of etireii/ [inquit) 
and It of itrofuu {aeqttor), 20 ; on 
alaceri a.nd some related Greek words, 
26 ; on vivere, 30 ; the Sanskrit lan- 
guage as the basis of linguistic science, 
and the labours of the German School 
in that field— are they not overvalued ?. 
113 ; on titillare and tiktciv, 213 ; 
the Anglo-Saxon language, etc., 
called in aid to support the doctrine 
which attributes a suffix agh or ag to 
Latin verbs, 216 ; reconsideration 
of substantives in -let, 220. 

; on the derivations 



of duntaxat, tranguillus, and si {sidis- 
placet) '69, 136-40; on the derivation 
of the Gothic hanfa, one-handed, 
140-2; on the derivation of the 
word hrifjios, 143-6 ; on the conver- 
tibility of n and d, 146-160 ; a sup- 
plemental paper on the Keltic suftix 
agh, etc., as occurring in Latin, 
Greek, and other related languages, 
273-84. 
on the derivation 






ip 



^3 



-^^Cr 



'64, 83-4. 



of maritimu9i aeditimuSf JinitimuSy 






^» **\ I 



I. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



33 



:£iy 









Key (Prof. T. H.) [continued] :— 
legieimuSy miles, dives^ '64, 26-8 ; a 
search in some European languages 
after the representatives of the Greek 
preposition ava as prefixed to yerbs, 
29-71 ; on the meaning of the verb 
adaequarey 72. 

on the derivation 

of 8on^ nurufy antM, uxor^ wife^ mif , 
vmnifty 8olu8f every ^ all, d\os, '68-9, 
257-72; on some of the sufSxes 
of Greek and Latin prepositions, 
295-311 ; a partial attempt to re- 
concile the laws of Latin Rhythm 
with those of modem languages, 
311-351. 

-on the Imperfect 






.rft> 



'9 



Infinitive, Imperfect Participles, and 
those substantives which fall under 
the definition nomen actionis, '62-8, 
63-72 ; miscellaneous remarks on 
some Latin words, armentum, 93 ; 
anntMj 94 ; amare, 94 ; amesj 94 ; 
alee or halee, 95 ; adulari, 96; 
Cauda, 95; ubi—cubi, alicubi, alibi, 
inde, unde, alicunde, etc., 96 ; istie, 
illic, hie, 96 ; abstemius, 97 ; dequa- 
lis, 97 ; astivus, 98 ; adoptio, 99 ; 
on some alleged distinctions in 
languages believed to be without 
foundation, 117-26; on the ety- 
mology of aarXoos, SixXoos, hnirhoov, 
etc., 127-8 ; on the etymology of 
ffToa, VToia, Dor. oraia, 138 ; on the 
etymology of dreumforaneua, eireu- 
lator, cento, 152-4; some remarks on 
the speech Pro Plancio, 139-142 ; a 
translation of, and comments on. 
Dr. Ahrenslr paper * On feminines 
in 'W and -»9 and the word ywn,* 
155-178; a translation of Dr. G. 
Henzen's paper * On the inscriptioii 
of Sora,' 179-187. 

on the formation 



) 



of Greek futures and first aorists, 
'67, 1 ; summary of argument, 17 ; 
on the German prefix Ver and allied 
forms, 93 ; on plural forms in Latin 
with a singular meaning, and es- 
pecially Yir^'s use of menta, 105 ; 
words formed in imitation of the 
sound of KAR as heard in scratch- 
ing, 375. 

on English Di- 
minutives, '66, 219-280; on the 
representatives of the Keltic suffix 
agh or ach 'little' in the Latin 
vocabulary, 295-364 ; \knuckle, its 
representative in Latin, 320. "^ 
on the English 



verb do and the Latin di-re, and on 
the formation of the English weak 
perfect, '44-46, 50 ; on the relation 
which exists between the verbs aller 
and andare, 143 ; the Lapp and Finn 
tongues not unconnected with the 
Indo-European family, 180 ; on the 
origin of certain Latin words, 
249. • 

on the misuse of the 



terms Epenthesis and Euphony^ 
'46-48, 45 ; on the origin of the 
demonstrative pronouns, indefinite 
article, the pronoun of the third 
person, the relative and interrogative, 
57 ; on the names of the parts of 
the human body as common to the 
several races of the Indo-European 
family, 115 ; on apparent exceptions 
from the tnliteral forms of mono- 
syllabic roots, 130 ; .on the origin of 
certain Latin words," 205. 

on the nature of the verb. 



particularly on the formation 'of the 
middle or passive voice, ' 60-2. 51-70; 
on the derivation and meaning of 
hiacere and hiare, reciprocus, vitu- 
per are, vesica, patrari, 89-96 ; 
torqttC're, ter-ere, col'Or, 103-9 ; on 
vowel assimilation, especially in re- 
lation to Professor Willis's experi- 
ment on vowel-sounds, 191-204. 

on the preposition ivi, in. 



and related words, '64, 85-95: on 
the etymology of the verb obsoleseere, 
131-2 ; on me preference for reflec- 
tive (or middle) forms in imperfect 
tenses of Latin verbs, alongside of 
the simple or non-reflective n)rm8 in 
perfects, as seen in the use of deverti, 
199, 200 ; on metathesis, 206-216. 
on the pronoims of the first 



and second persons, '48-60, 25 ; an 
attempt to prove the identity of the 
roots is, was, and he, 87. 

on tiie Latin verb mittere. 



its origin and affinities; and gene- 
rally on verbs signifying * to go ' in 
the Indo-European fanmy, '66, 1-15 ; 
on the derivation and meaning of 
the Latin verb usurpare, 96-103; 
on Greek accentuation, 119-145. 

on the word inkling, '67, 



116-16. 
Knowledge, power, and birth, etc., 

relation of the ideas of, and .their 

origin, '66, 208. 
Knowledge, Revelach and Wedlock: on 

the last syllable in the words, '62-8, 

33. 



/ 



3 






A 



/a 



34 

^9 



[. 



.«' .u/,/ 



■ f 



'^-^ .-^^ 



84 INDEX TO PROO. AJTO TBANS. PHILOIXW. SOC. 1842-79. 



Knawlea, Eev. E. II., on Aia as used 

of the tlsal cause, 'B6, 181. 
hiueklc, its raprBMntative in Lntin, 

'H, 320. 
Koelle's PolTglolta Africana, BL-couat 

of, etc., 'U, 85, 185. 
Korean, bj Mr. R. N.Cugl.'T7-e. 613; 

reladunatiip of, to Japaneee, 6 1 6. 
KcHaka and their literature, 'M-2, 27. 
Kouri languagai, '68, 107. 
Krit and TadMita affixes defined, 'S9, 



with the notion of con- 
nd formally referalile to a 
or irii*, '60-3, 137-31, 



Eutani lun^age, 'G6, 70. 

I final dropt in aroliaii; Latin prosody, 
'67, 40H ; instances of lose of, 388. 

-I, silent in Koramn and English, '68-9, 
417. 

i=", ■62-3* 18 ; l = r, 278. 

I and if often interchanmsd, '68. 39. 

I and r, changes of, in Sanskrit, '62-8, 
13 ; Romance, 44. 

•I and -U, worde endioe in, 'ST, 107, 
108 : I dead as a diminutive, 112. 

Labial ussal preferred to dental, in 
Latin, '6S, 70. 

Labiale, Latin, changed into French 
soft J or_;', '87, 9-29. 

•Ak, Anglo- t>ai. sufiii, '62-3, 31sqq.; 
41, 46 H. 1 ; 48 sq. 

Laceadive Inlands , language of , ' 77-B, 89 . 

Lady ckssical Htodenla, '78-4, 231, 

Lancashire, the Races of, aa iiidicated 
by the Local Names, and the Dialect 
of the County, by the Rev. J, 
Davies, 'fiS, 210-284; cbarscto- 
istics of the people of, 213. 

ZjrnaiM, possible older form of lingua, 
'67. 

lADguage. All languages modiflca- 
liumi of one primaeval tongue, '48-B, 
31 ; the Chmese the moat faithful 
roprewntatiTe now eitant of such 
pnnueval laagnage, lb. See Letter 
changes, Philosophy of Language, 
etc. Latdn Langmges : — Niebuhr's 
atEument in support of the twofold 
origin of the Latin considered, Ilfi. 



Language, phonetiGs of, '73-4, JGl ; 
social genesis of, 18 ; stndy of, as a 
phenomenoa, 21, 31 ; theories as to, 
10. 

its relative import, '44-6, 

375 ; names of material objetta de- 
scriptive epithets, ii. ; things Imown 
by their accidents, not in their 
essence, 278; no words in their 
origin concrete, iit. ; nanus either 
enbjectiTe or objeetive, 277; hence 
denvativea of the same word often 
bear opposite significationB— Ex- 
amples, ii, - the phrase Us-tHeit 
considered, 278 ; names of the car- 
dinal points of the compass generally 
equivalent to before, behind, left, 
right. 279 ; in different languages 
interchange vrith each other, ib. 

its roots which snbstitnte a 

final ( for the "abrupt tone," '60-2, 
41-49; the ample verb the one 
fonntain of, 51-65. 

written and spoken, '62-3, 

132 sq.; 232. 

I.anguages, the historical unity of ; not 
eonntenanced by scientiflo inquiry, 
'BO-1, 21. 

all formed from monosylla- 
bic roots by agclutination of sylla- 
bles, each a setf-signiticant word, 
'BB-S, 120; the iiaaal alleged dis- 
tinctions in languages shown to be 
gronndleas, 117-126; not neees- 
sarily related because they poBsess 
simiJar words for the same ubjeeta, 
as these words vrere probably formed 
independently, from natural sounds, 
188, eto. 

Langne d'Oil, its three dialects, '8S-9, 
S52;orfour,accordiBgtoLittr£, 363. 

Latham (R. C), miscellaneous con- 
tributions to the ethnography of 



f the 1 






- origin of, '^S, lOB ; '63-8, 



vincinlisms of Holland and Fries- 
land, 128 ; coutribotions to the study 
of the langnages of Africa, 218. 

on the languages of 

the Papuan or Negrito race scattered 
through the Australian and other 
Asiatic islands, '43-4, 37 : on the 
doctrine of the Ctesora in the Greek 
Senarius, 129 ; on the evidence of 
B connetion between the Cimbri and 
the CherGOnesus Cimbrica, 181 ; on 
the recipincal pronouns and on the 
reciprocal power of the reflective 
verb, 232. 



I. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTTS. 



35 



Latham (R. G.) on certain additions 
to the vocabularies of the Caffre 
languages, '48-50, 10; remarks upon 
a vocabulary of the Bonny language, 
73; on the connexion between the 
ideas of association and plurality as 
an influence in the evolution of 
inflexion, 79 ; on a vocabulary of 
the Cameroons language, 136 ; on a 
vocabulary of tlie Avekvom language, 
183; on the original area of the 
Slavonic population, 187, 215, 

on certain classes in 

African philology, *68, 107. 

on certain recent 



additions to African philology, *65, 
85-95, 185-206. 

on the Aorists in Ka, 



*52-8, 37-9; remarks on lists of 
personal pronouns and numerals, of 
the Mallicolo and Erromango lan- 
guages, 58-62 ; on the languages 
of New California, 72-8. 

on the GepidflB, '57, 



1-8 ; on the Tushi languages, 32-8. 
on the languages 



of Northern, Western, and Central 
America,' 56, 67-115; on the word 
distributed as used in logic, 190-5. 

on the name and 



nation of the Dacian King Dece- 
balus, with notices of the Agathyrsi 
and Alani, '54, 109 sq. ; on certain 
additions to the ethnographical 
philology of Central America, with 
remarks upon the so-called Aztek 
conquest of Mexico, 151-56 ; his 
remarks on Mr. Mansfield's list of 
Payaffw^ words, 230-33. 

Latin, decrease of its use in Hungary, 
'55, 287. 

English Dictionary, earliest 

known, '65, 219. 

etymologies, by Th. Au- 



frecht, '58, 13. 

fifth declension, '52-8, 168 ; 



7 w * 

second declension, nominative plural 
in m, 179. 
Latin language and literature. See 
Etymology, Formation of the Geni- 
tive, etc. ; on the nomen of G. 
Verres, '48-50, 75 ; according to 
Muretus the family name was Verres, 
t^. ; objections, ih. ; it seems to have 
been Cornelius, 77 ; this Nomen too 
common to be distinctive, and there- 
fore omitted in the designation 
C. Verres, 78 ; suggestion that the 
latter element of the verbal forms, 
ama-veramf amarvero^ ama-visset/if 



etc., is connected with the German 
wesMf 34 ; also of the forms amu' 
verunt, amU'Vistia, ama'Visti, ama- 
VI, 35. 

Latin MSS., age of existing, '67, 201. 

r — (old), ori^ of futures of 

tiiird conjugation m, '67, 36, 125. 

orthography, '78-4, 78 ; philo- 
logy, 229, 395 ; pronunciation, 398 ; 
vowel intensification, 288. 

representatives of the Keltic 



suflix agh or achy 'little,' '56, 295- 
354; adjectives in -aw?, -eo, 300-319; 
in aci' or ac-, 307, 311, 312 ; in ad-, 
t/t-, 308 ; in ab-, undo-, 308 ; in 
icio', 346 ; in tili-y 347 ; in il-, und-, 
351 ; adiectives in t-, origin of, 324, 

• etc. ; suDstantives in a have lost a 
final guttural, 300, etc. ; as also 
those in e^ 319 ; in i, 319 ; and in 
M, tb. ; and those in i and u are 
diminutival, 321, 322 ; substantives 
in ag-on, 301 ; in aC'tUo and ac-ro, 
306; in ec- and tV;-, 312, 313; in 
eC'tO' or eto-, 316 ; in men-, 340 ; 
in ig-on, 343 ; in tura, 347n ; in 
ium-^ 347 ; in gon- and don-^ 349 ; 
substantives in o, origin of, 318 : 
substantives in t- and «-, as nubis or 
nubesy 323 ; verbs in a have lost a 
final guttural, 306 ; as also those 
in t-, 343 ; frequentative verbs, 
346. 

supine in -turn is not passive, 

'62-8, 124. 
Lajamon's Possessives in ea and hiSy 

'65, 76. 
Leake, Col., his account of the Battle 

of Marathon questioned, '54, 1-10. 
his wrong account of the 

positions of the fleet before and after 

the Battle of Salamis, '52-8, 107, 

111 ; and of the situations of Cyno- 

sura, Ceos, etc., 103 
Leducq, H., on the origin and primi- 
tive meaning of the word ange, 

'52-8, 41-9. 
Lee-shore, '44-6, 278. 
Legends in history pragmatised, '54, 

217-28. 
Legerlotz, cited, '62-8, 15. 
Lehrs (K.), opinion on Hor. Ode iii. 

quoted, '67, 221. 
'kik, Scand. -lezze in the Ormulum, 

'^•8, 42 ; distinct from A.-Sax. 

'loe, 41. 
Leland, Mr. C. C, the Gypsies and 

their language, '77-9, xviii. 
Lemon's English Etymology, 1783, 

notice of, '59, 266. 



36 INDEX TO PROC. AND TRANS. PHILOLOQ. SOC. 1842-79. 



Leo (Ferienschriften) corrected, '62-3, 
31. 

Lepsius's Standard Alphabet, remarks 
on, *67, 1 Ap. 4, 6. 

Leskien, Prof. A., on Lithuanian, 
Lettish, and Prussian, *77-9, 44. 

'let, English suffix, '62-3, 220 sqq. 

•kty on diminutives in, '57, 93-115; 
in Saxon words, is the base of little, 
102 ; and not a compound of el and 
et, 103. 

Letter-changes, Latin and Teutonic, 
'58, 16, and see Interchange. 

: — the initial letter-change 

of the Indo-European languages, 
'44-6, 233 ; in some cases an actual 
substitution of a guttural for a 
labial, etc., in others the guttural, 
labial, etc., the representative of a 
complex sound, ib. ; the digamma 
sometimes had the power of a double 
consonant and prooably a complex 
sound, 234 : represented by the 
"Welsh gwy whicn occasionally be-i 
comes g or h, ib. ; the digamma 
sometimes becomes y or 3, ib. ; the 
forms yoivos for o7vo^, ylapes for eip 
and yplvos a shield, 23 o ; the ^olic 
forms $p6Bov and fipiCai 236 ; Boeo- 
tian form $aph, ioiyvvii, ib. ; theElean 
Fparpa for (iiirpaf yupos, speech, 
fipoyxos a frog, F4pKos an enclosure, 

. 237 ; derivation of the English 
word penny, ib. ; list of words which 
take the digamma or its substitutes, 
238 ; results which follow from the 
hypothesis of an original complex 
sound, ib. ; mutation of the initial 
w to ubf 239 ; a connexion traced 
between tiie verbs went and go, and 
va and alier, by means of the letter- 
changes, 143 ; aller identical with 
andare, which may be connected 
with vadoy 144 ; go probably con- 
nected with vado, 145 ; origin of the 
verb to walk, 146. 

■ Parallelisms : — Their defini- 

tion, '46-8, 165: appear to have 
existed in the very infancy of lan- 
guage, 166 ; may have given rise to 
the initial permutations of the Celtic, 
167 ; the labials of the primeval 
language probably four, p, p\ m, 
Wf lb8 ; the Cochin Chinese obtained 
a b from j9, the Hokkeen dialect from 
m, 169 ; the first of these letter- 
changes very rare, the latter common, 
ib. ; the Sanscrit labials p, p\-m, 
bj b\ V, 170 ; /had a double origin, 
p* and Wf ib. ; ia these inquiries we 



do not distinguish between v and w, 
. ib. ; the Indo-European w is found 
transformed both into the Gothic and 
into the Irish /, ib. ; in certain 
languages / interchanges with h or 
an open vowel, 171 ; so the digamma 
with a rough or smooth breathing, 
ib, ; these cases considered, 172 ; 
parallelism between m and w, ib. ; 
changes of m into by 173; the Indo- 
European b generally formed from 
Wf and b* from hw, 173 ; examples, 
ib. ; interchanges between the Greek 
and Irish b and the Indo-European 
Wf ib. ; interchanges of the b and w 
in our own and other Gothic dialects, 
174; the letters g, d (like b) un- 
known to the primeval languages, 
174 ; early known to the Indo- 
European languages, ib. ; tendency 
in the Gothic and Celtic languages 
to harden b, g, d, into p, ky t, ib. ; 
great importance of distinguishing 
Detween the tenues and medise, 174 ; 
parallelisms between p and b may 
generally be traced to parallelisms 
Detween p and v, 175. The 'pri- 
meval language appears to have nad 
four aspirates p\ k', <*, cA' ; the 
Sanscrit eight, p\ k\ <*, eh\ ^*, rf*, 
g\ yS 175 ; the Greek <^, x» ^» re- 
present both the Sanscrit p\ A;*, <*, 
and the Sanscrit b\ g*, d% ib. ; as 
do the Gothic initials /, A, th, 1 76 ; 
hypothesis to account for this dimi- 
nution in the number of aspirates, 
176; the tendency of the Gothic is 
to harden the Indo-European b, g, d, 
into py ky ty and the Indo-European 
Py ky t, into/. A, th, 177 ; hypothesis 
to account for the fact that the Gothic 
mediae sometimes answer to the Indo- 
European tenues, 178; the changes 
of the labials reviewed, 179 ; 
Grimm's * Canons' examined, 181. 

Lettish and Lithuanian, their connexion, 
'77-9, 47 ; grammars, 52 ; diction- 
aries, 53. 

Lexicography, Dr. Murray on the pro- 
blems and principles of, '77-9, 573. 

'le-^Z^ i^ ^^^ Ormulum = leik in Scand. , 
'62-3, 42. 

Lhuyd (not Pritchard), the first to 
notice the relationship between the 
"Welsh hwynt, ynt, and the Latin nt, 
'52-8, 137. 

Lhuyd |Edw.), the first to point out 
the affinity between the Celtic dialects 
and other languages of the Indo- 
European famuy, '42-4, 92. 



I. INDEX OF ArXHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



37 



Life of S. Edmund the Confessor, '62-$, 
9; S. Edmund the King, 3; S. 
Eenelm, d. 

Light and Sound, relation of words 
denoting, *58, 6. 

-KiKOy *62-8, 112. 

Lindmann's etymology of seqtiestero, 
/62-3, 22. 

Lindisfame Gospels, Latin and Saxon 
texts of, '68-9, 288. 

•ling, 0. Eng., »62-8, 109. 

'ling, -lings, Dutch, '62-8, 94 ; ^loke, 
112. 

'linga, A. Sax., '62-8, 94. 

-lingen, Mid H. Germ., '62-3, 94. 

'Hughe, Mid. Dutch, '62-8, 94. 

'lingis, 0. Eng^ '62-8, 100. 

'lings, Mod. H. Germ., '62-a> 94 ; 
Mod. Dutch, 94. 

•lingun, 0. H. Germ., '62-8, 93 sq. 

-/m«, Scotch, '62-8, 93. 

Lithuanian, origin of the terminal Uka 
in the names lor 1 1 and 12, '57,29-32. 

Lithuanian, Lettish, and Prussian^ 
Report on, 1876, by Professw A. 
Leskien, '77-9) 44 ; granunars, 49 ; 
dictionaries, 50. 

Lithuanian God Perkunas = Hindu God 
Parjanya ; '59, 164 : tale of, 166. 

Liyius Andronicus, quoted, '62-8, 21. 

Zl liquid, not known in Norman and 
English, '68-9, 413. 

Lloegrians were Celtic, '66, 217. 

Locative and Dative of ontf origin, 
'62-8, 146. 

Loeerians, not exterminated, but gradu- 
ally amalgamated with the Saxon, 
'57, 82. 

LooAN (Dr.), on the Indo-Chinese 
. Languages, '77-9, 79. 

Logic V, Poetry, '62-8, 136, 142. 

Logical Phraseology, suggestions of 
names for predicables to express every 
way in which we can predicate or 
deny one notion of another, in which 
some is not all, '52-3, 28-30. 

-long, Eng., '62-8, 99, 102, 107, 108, 
origin of, 112. 

Lonsdale dialect, glossary of, '67, 2 Ap. 

dialect of ,'62-3, 242 w. 1, 263. 

LoTTNEB (Dr.), on the forms and 
oripn 01 the pronouns of the first 
and second persons '59, 34-66. Cor- 
rections of and additions to this 
paper, 285-6. 

remarks on the nation in 

which the Cuneiform mode of writing 
was invented, '58, 124 ; on the most 
ancient ethnographical state of West- 
em Asia historically known, 137. 



LoTTNER (Dr.), on sister families of 
languages, especially those connected 
with the Semitic family, ^60-61, 
20-7, 112-32; on the Norse origin of 
are, the plural present of the English 
verh substantive, 63. 

on traces of the Italic im- 
perfect in the Keltic languages, '59, 
31-4. 

Low Countries, old inhabitants and 
state of, '55, 168. 

//•, Sans., vowel, '62-8, 133. 

Lucretius, quoted, '62-3, 213. 

Ludlow (J. M.), jottings in legal ety- 
mology, '54, 113-9 ; lord paramount 
and tenant paravail, 113 ; vavasor, 
116; average, 116; grant, 117-9; 
further notes on the etymology of 
the word grant, 124-30 ; garnishee, 
124 ». 

on the French soft g or j, as 

representing the Latin lahials, with 
or without an attendant vowel, '57, 
9-29. 

^lunga, A. Sax., '62-3, 94. 

-/y, Eng., '62-3, 107-9. 

Lycian inscriptions, how deciphered) 
'42-4, 193; the vowels, 194; the 
alphabet generally, 196 ; bilingual 
inscription (Lycian and Greek) at 
Limyra, 197; at Levise, ib.\ at 
Antiphellus, 200 ; at Tlos, 203 ; 
Lycian inscription at Koorostan, ib. ; 
at Gandyva, ib. ; at Limyra, 204 ; 
on the Sarcophagus- tomb atXanthus, 
205 ; at Armostel near Limyra, ib, ; 
second inscription at Gandyva, 206 ; 
inscription near Limyra, ib. ; at 
Myra, 207; at Antiphellus, 208; 
two inscriptions near Armostel, 209 ; 
inscription at Xanthus, ib. ; near 
Cadyanda, ib. ; two other inscriptions 
at Limyra, 210 ; inscriptions near 
Armostel, 211; at Sura, 212; at 
Cyane, 213 ; at Khodiopolis, ih. ; at 
Antiphellus and at Limyra, 214 ; at 
Tlos, 215. 

Lydian dynasty of the Mermnadse not 
fahulous, '42-4, 274 ; probably an 
Assyrian race, 276. 

Lyndsay, quoted, '62-3, 104. 

M final dropt in archaic Latin prosody, 

'67, 404. 
M final in pronouns for n., '62-3, 8. 
M and B frequently interchanged in 

Eastern languages. See letter change. 
M and Ny origin of the forms, '60-2, 4. 
m and n nasal, unknown in Norman 

and English, '68-9,411. 



38 INDEX TO PROC. AND TRANS. PHILOLOG. SOC. 1842-79. 



MSS.f comparatiye Talue of, and 
methods ot editing, '78-4, 333 ; or- 
thography, 433. 

fia, on tne original form of, by Th. 
Anfrecht, *59, 16. 

may mi, or na, ni, the roots of the 
pronoun /, in African languages, 
^59, 37. 

Macaulay, and ahamy '55, 212n, and 
* parts,' 303. 

Madagascar, language and dialects of, 
'77-9, 106; origin of the name, 
283«. 

Magyar, the, of Median descent, ^42-Ay 
127; under what names known to 
the later Greeks, 128 ; many Persian 
terms significant in Magyar, 128; 
many names of places found both in 
Persia and Hungary, ib, 

Malagasy language, oy Rev. "W. E. 
Cousins, '77-9, 283 ; vocabularies 
of, 284 ; alphabet of, 287 ; pefixes 
and suffixes, 290 : reduplication in, 
292 ; inflexions absent in, ib, ; dia- 
lects of, 296; folklore, 298; rela- 
tions of to other languages, ib, 

Malay language and its divisions, '77-9, 
90. 

■ — languages ; their connection 

with the Indo- German considered, 
'60-1, 127. 

Malayan languages, the primitive roots 
not verbal, '5l-3, 206. 

Maiden (H.), on Greek Hexameters, 
'50-2, 149-157. 

on Greek and English versi- 
fication, '46-8, 96. 

on some Greek lyrical metres. 



'54, 10-26 ; the Dorian, 11 ; Sap- 
phic, 14; Alcaic, 16; that shown 
m * Te Deos oro, Sybarin cur pro- 
peras, amando, '17-19; Pherecratean, 
19-20, 22 ; Glyconean, 19-20 ; As- 
clepiad, 20-23; Sapphic of sixteen 
syllables, 20; Phaloecian, 20, 22, 
23; Priapeian, 21 ; lonic-a-majore- 
with-a-trochaic - syzygy, 23 ; on 
pragmatised legends in history, 217- 
228. 

on the Amphictyonic League 



and the meaning of the term Am- 
phictyones, '52-8, 61-8. 

on connecting vowels in 



Greek, '62-8, 283. 

on mistakes in the use of 



obsolete Greek words by Attic writers, 
'44-6, 67, 265. 

on Perfect Tenses in Greek, 



and especially the First Perfect 
Active, '66, 168. 



Maiden, on the Fncontracted Form of 
the Genitive Case Singular of Greek 
Nouns of the Second Declension, '66, 
146-164. 

Maldive Islands, language of, '77-9, 88. 

Mallicolo language, snort vocabulary of, 
'52-58, 59. 

Malory, Pr. Arthur, quoted, '62-3, 90. 

Manavit, M., observations on his life 
of Cardinal Mezzofanti, '54, 133, etc. 

Mandingo languages, '58, 107-116 ; 
117; 121; 122. 

Manning, Serjeant, Statements of, on 
English Possessives in ea and his con- 
troverted, '65, 76. 

Mansfield, C. B., first printed list 
of Payagw& and some account of the 
Payagw&s, with remarks by Dr. 
Latham, '54, 229-237. 

Manx, supposed consuetudinal mood in, 
'62-8,31. 

Manx halfpence, possible origin of the 
device on, '67, 264. 

Marathon, battle of, explanation of 
some difficulties in the currently 
received account of, '54, 1-10. 

Marherete, Seinte, quoted, '62-8, 95. 

Marsh, Hon. G. P., Notes on Hens- 
leigh "Wedgwood's Dictionary of 
English Etymology, and on some 
words not discussed by him, 66, 187 ; 
postscript to same, 307. 

Marshal, John, one of the earliest 
cultivators of Sanscrit literature, 
'46-8, 129. 

Martin's English Dictionary, 1748- 
1749, noticed, '59, 264. 

Mahtineau, Russell, Esq., Obituary 
of Franz Bopp, '67, 305 ; Report 
on Mr. E. Jones's " Common Sense 
of English Orthography, 316. 

Masculine ending -^r, '62-8, 16. 

-/HOT- and -/iov- in Greek, '62-8, 313. 

Mayob, Prof. J. B., on English Metre, 
'77-9, 267, iv. 

Median language and nation, '58, 129; 
140. 

Medo-Persian History, an attempt at 
an Outline of the Early Medo- 
Persian History, founded on the 
Rock Inscriptions of Behistun taken 
in combination with the accounts of 
Herodotus and Ctesias, '52-8, 
13-26. 

Members elected, '44-6, 31, 67, 77, 
109, 131, 177, 189, 267, 276. 

Members, original, '42-4, 1 ; elected 
during the first session, 37, 67, 77, 
91, 119. 127; during ijie second 
session, 149, 161, 193, 243, 266. 



I. Iin>EX OF ArTHOKS AKD SUBJECTTS. 



39 



Members elected: Sig. Bernardino 
Biondelli (honorary), *64, 282 ; Edw. 
Buller, 73 ; C. U. Dasent, 238 ; E. 
B.Eastwick, 73; T. Goldstucker, 29 ; 
Sir George Grey, 217 ; J. P. Hicks, 
29 ; M. H. Irving, 297 ; Lord R. 
Montagu, 73 ; John Oxenford, 297 ; 
J. J. S. Perowne, 217; Lloyd Phil- 
lips, 297 ; E. J. Selwyn, 217. 

Dr. Altschul, '52-3, 61 ; 0. 

Ferris, 31. 

Case, W. A., '60-2, 25; 



Clarke, "W. G., 25 ; Day, Maurice,^ 
71; Davieef, J., 149; Hose, H. J., 
191 ; Munro, H. A. J., 26 ; Wey- 
mouth, R. F., 26. 

Jackson, E. S., '55, 210; 



Lowy, Rev, A., 185. 
Meriy process of its change from man, 

'52-8, 121. 
'fnen- and 'mento- in Latin, '62-63, 

3148q. 
MeniuMy Virgil's use of, in plural, dis- 
cussed, '67, 105; etymology, 111. 
Meropy, science of, '73-4, 30. 
Metaphysical terms in origin material, 

'62-3, 142. 
Metathesis, false examples of, '54, 206- 

208 ; its true limits (to s, A, r, /), 

209-216. 
of r, '62-3, 273 sqq. ; Bopp 

on, 168. 
Metivier, his explanation of the word 

^a//otr, in Shakespere's Lear, '58, 124. 
Metre, English, by Prof. J. B. Mayor, 

'7f-9, 267 iv. 
' accent as a guide to, '73-4, 

35 ; English, 624 ; terminology of, 

644 ; French decasyllabic, 646. 

of Chaucer and of the 



* Chasteau d' Amour, '62-8, 69 ; of 
Homer, Ovid, Horace, etc., 80. 

Metres, pedigree of the sdrucciolo and 
endecasillaoo, '67, 61. 

Metrt gratia, open to suspicion, as an 
explanation of difficulties, '67, 12. 

Metncal Homilies, '62-8, 44 n. 1. 

Romances, '62-8, 98 ; 

Glossary, 99. 

3feticulo8U8f a Latin word, '56, 320. 

Mexicans substitute tl for initial /, 
'46-8, 45. 

Mexico, on the so-called Astek Con- 
quest of, '54, 165, 166. 

Mezzofanti, Cardinal, on his extra- 
ordinary powers as a linguist, '50-52, 
111-126. 

. Mr. Watts on Dr. Russell's 

Life of '59, 227-56 ; Mr. Pulszky's 
account of his interview with, 262-3. 



Mezzofanti, his extraordinary powers 
as a linguist, '54, 133-150 [and see 
also the Edinburgh Review for Octo- 
ber, 1864, for further notices and a 
review of Mr. Watts's papers]. 
Mexico, languages of Northern Pro- 
vinces of, '56, 91; new languages of, 
96 ; Guatimala, etc., 107. 
Meter, P., on Romance Philology, 
'73-4, 407. 

Middle or Passive Voice, on the for- 
mation of, '50-2, 67; Voice, ex- 
amples of, in Latin, 58 ; the suffix r 
or * of it is the accusative ae, 60, 61. 

Miltiades, his plan before and at the 
battle of Marathon, '54, 1-10. 

Mimetic Origin of Language illus- 
trated, '67, 376. 

Mimetic Theory, '62-8, 219. 

Minarelli's list of 1 14 languages known 
by Mezzofanti, Questioned, '59, 230. 

Minsheu, notice of his English Diction- 
ary, A.D. 1617, '69, 261. 

Mistaken identity in origin of words, 
example of, '66, 1. 

Mittere, to cause to go, let go, send ; 
its origin and affinities investigated, 
'55, 1-16. 

Modo, the etymolo^ of, '54, 97-107. 

MollitiiSy emendation in Sallust (Jug. 
63, 3) for munditiis of the editions, 
'67, 244. 

Mon or Peguan language and alphabet, 
'77-9, 75. 

Monnoyeur, le faux, a title of Philippe 
le Bel, '58, 2. 

Months, the Latin names of, bad, '55, 
297 ; Kossuth's attempt to change 
them in Hungarian, 298. 

MoRFiLL, Mr. W. R., on the Servian 
Language, '77-9, viii. ; on the 
Bulgarian language, ix. 

Morris, R., on the word groveling and 
grovelling^ and the connection of the 
syllable 'ling in groveling with the 
-long in headlong, sidelong, etc., 
'62-3, 86. 

Morte Arthure, '62-3, 92, 105. 

Notes on the Roxburghe 

Club Edition of, '60-1, 279. 

Moskito Country, languages of , ' 56, 1 1 1 • 

Mosquito Vocabulary, '73-4, 350. 

Miiller, Max, criticized, '58, 127 sq. 

argument for the antiquity 

of Sanscrit, '62-8, 116 ; etymology 
of Kdka Sanskr. 119 ; etymology of 
Oo, Sanskr. 120 ; etymology of aroma, 
121; etymology of «ot«/, 142; on the 
origin of language, 138; self-oov^"* 
diction of, 140 sq. 



40 INDEX TO PROC. AND TRANS. PHILOLOG. SOC. 1842-79. 



Miiller, Max, remarks on philosophy 
of lang:aage, '73-4, 249. 

Music and Poetry agree, *62-8, 68. 

Murray, Dr. J. A. H., Notes on West 
Somerset Dialect, *77-9, 25 1 ; 
Annual Address, 1878-9; On the 
Society's Work in 1878-9, 661 ; On 
the Progress of the Society's Dic- 
tionary, 567 ; On Abstracts of the 
Society's Proceedings, 565 ; On the 
Problems and Principles of Lexi- 
cography, 573; On the word Caviare, 
674 ; On the word Abyss, 576 ; On 
the words Abnormal and Abnor- 
mous, 677 ; On the word Carousal, 
577 ; On the word Aboard, 678 ; 
On the word Castle, 678 ; On the 
verbs and participles in -atey 680 ; 
On Compound Words, 682 ; On the 
word Address, 622 ; On the Absence 
of the Accusative in Caucasian Lan- 
guages, 618. 

JV final dropt in Plautus, '67, 408. 

iV=/, '62-3, 18; =r, 277; =^313; 
=:th, 6 ; final, growing into ndy 12, 
14 ; initial, usually the result of de- 
capitation, 166 ; added after r, 2/7 ; 
n+8, changes of, 21 ; v+a, in Greek, 
21 ; y dropped after a in Old Greek, 
300. 

J\r and d, Prof. Key on convertibility 
of, '69, 145-60. 

V, on the vocalization or evanescence 
of, by Dr. Donaldson, '64, 282-296. 

Nares's Glossarv, '62-3, 103. 

Nash, D. W., Esq., on Gaulish Names, 
'65, 97. 

Natanleod, meaning of this Anglo- 
Saxon compound, '42-4, 11. 

National Names, Etymology of, '60-1, 
199 ; Brittones, Picti, 289 ; Celtae, 
Galatae, Galli, 202 ; Cymro, A pp., 
99 ; Deutschen, Teutones, 201, 203, 
216; Welsh, 199. See also the 
List of Gaulish Derivations, '66, 
97. 

Natural Sounds (not the imitation of 
sounds) and the words formed from 
them, ^62-3, 188-206. 

Negation implied in comparison, ex- 
plains French idioms, *67, 157. 

Negrito languages, term defined, '42- 
44, 37 ; spoken in the Andaman, 
Nicobar and Camicobar islands, and 
in Malacca, ib. ; in Sumatra, Orang 
Cooboo, Orang Googoo, Borneo, the 
Sooloo islands, and the Manillas, 
38; in Formosa, the Loochoo islands, 
Java, Savoo, Timor, Ombay, 39 ; 



in Celebes, Bourou, Gilolo, the Tee- 
tees, Oby and New Guinea 40 ; in 
Waigioo, Gueb4, 41 ; in the Fiji 
Islands, New Ireland, Manicolo, 
MaUicollo, Tanna, New Caledonia 
and Australia, 42 ; in Van Diemen's 
Land and New Guinea, 43 ; vocabu- 
laries of New Guinea compared with 
each other, 44 ; of New Ireland, 46 ; 
of Australia, 46 ; of Van Diemen's 
Land, 48 ; vocabularies of different 
islands compared with each other, 
ib. ; of Andaman and Samang, of 
New Guinea and Waigioo, ib. ; of 
New Guinea and New Ireland, 49 ; 
of Port Praslin and Carteret Bay, 
f^. ; of New Ireland and Manicolo, 
of Manicolo and MaUicollo, of Mal- 
licollo and Tanna, of the last two 
and New Caledonia, 50 ; of Port Dal- 
rymple and King George's Sound, 
of Port Dalrymple and Gulf St. 
Vincent, of Port Dalrymple «nd 
Jervis's Bay, 61 ; the vocabularies 
of distant districts compared with 
each other, 62; author's conclusions, 
54. 

Neologisms in Hungarian, '58, 33, 
sgg. 

Neuter, ending of, '62-3, 8. 

Newman, Francis W., on the Fmbrian 
language, '62-3, 167. 

' Notes on the Galla verb 

and pronoun, '46-8, 126. 

on Scythia and the surround- 



ing countries according to Herodotus, 
'42-4, 77 ; on the Berber language 
of Mount Atlas, generally supposed 
to be that of the ancient Maurita- 
nians, 136. 

Nicaraguan language, Mexican, '54, 
153. 

Nicobar Islands, language and dialects 
of, '77-9, 87. 

NicoL, H., on the diphthong -a«, '77- 
9, 562 ; on some points in Early 
English pronunciation, vi ; on some 
English derivations, xii ; on Middle 
English Orthography, ix. 

— -^— on M. Gaston Paris's method 
of editing, '73-4, 332; on Old 
French Labial Vowels, 77. 

NiEBUHR, his arguments in favour of 
the twofold origin of the Latin 
language an unsound one, '46-8, 
115. 

2fo : Australian languages named after 
the negative adverb, '65, 73. 

Nominative, denotes the agent, '60-2, 
56, 69. 



I. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



41 



Norfolk words, list of, collected by 
Anna Guraey, *56, 29-39. 

Norman French words in the Lanca- 
shire dialect, '65, 278, 279 ; Norman 
Conquest not much felt in Lancashire, 
281. 

Norman dialect of the 12th and 13th 
centuries, the characteristics of, 
'68-9, 360-7. 

Norman element in the spoken and 
written English of the I2th, 13th, 
and 14th centuries, and in our pro- 
vincial dialects, by Joseph Payne, 
*68-9, 352-449. 

Normans, influence of their conquest 
of Russia on its people and literature, 
'50-2, 29. 

NoRRis, E., on the Vei language and 
its affinities, '48-0, 135; North Ameri- 
can lan^ua^s, Yid. Polysynthesis, 
168 ; Vocabularies of the dialects 
spoken by the Shawnees, the Nipis- 
smgue, the New Brunswick, and the 
Blackfoot Indians, 102, etc. ; Yocabu- 
laries of dialects spoken by the 
Chipewyan, Beaver and Sikanni 
Indians, 192 ; by the Eutani, Flat- 
head, Okanagan and Shoushwhap, 
199 ; the Loucheux language prob- 
ably connected with the Languages of 
Bussian America, 184. 

Norris's Ancient Cornish Drama, im- 
portance of, for Celtic linguistics, 
W, 24. 

Norse, Old, vowel of suflSx governed 
by that of the root, '62-3, 217. 

neuter participles, in it, '56, 

348. 

North's Plutarch, quoted, '62-3, 103. 

North' American Review , audits notion 
of Hungarian, '55, 309. 

Northumbrian Dialect: This dialect 
supplies important links in the his- 
tory of the Teutonic languages, '44-6, 
123 ; its monuments' are supplied 
by MSS. and by inscriptions on 
stones and coins, 124 ; the fragment 
of Cffidmon and the Durham Gospels 
and Ritual, ib, ; the Psalter, Vesp. 
A. i., 125 ; the difference between 
the dialect of the Gospel and that oi 
the Psalter probably owing to Norse 
influence, 127 ; the vowel system of 
the Northumbrian dialect, 131 ; the 
Low -German dialects bound together 
by the peculiar system of consonants, 
132 ; the Moeso-Gothic on the whole 
a Low- Dutch dialect, ib. ; the dwel- 
lers in the Sette and Quindeci com- 
munes a High-Dutch race, 133 ; 



the three short and the seven long 
vowels of the Moeso-Gothic, 134 ; 
the i and u of the Moeso-Gothic 
^ sometimes represented by the e and 
^ of the later dialects, 135; the e 
sometimes represented by the Anglo- 
Saxon eoj and the short u by «a, ib. ; 
vowels at the end of a word, how 
affected in Anglo-Saxon, 136 ; the 
vowels, how affected by the vowel of 
the succeeding syllable, ib. ; Moeso- 
Gothic vowels and their Anglo-Saxon 
equivalents, 138 ; the Northumbrian 
vowels in some respects hold a middle 
* place between the older forms and 
those of the West Saxon, 139 ; the 
Northumbrian vowels and their West 
Saxon equivalents, ib. 

R. B. Peacock on, 

'62-8, 232; adjectives, 244; adverbs, 
257; article, definite, 234 ; auxiliary 
verbs, 248 ; conjunctions, 256 ; de- 
finite article, 234 ; foreign elements 
in, 237, n. 3 ; interjections, 259 ; 
numerals, 246 sq. ; possessive scarcely 
exists in, 244 ; prepositions, 254 ; 
preposition, i, 238 ; pronouns, 247 ; 
relative at (=.that), 239; substan- 
tives, 243 ; verbs, 248 ; verb sub- 
stantive, 240. 

Dialects, Essay on, '67, 2 



Ap., 2 Pt 



240. 



verb substantive, '62-3, 



Norwegian language, '73-4, 96 ; philo- 
logy, 444. 

Notation (Arithmetical), Roman system 
of, '67, I Ap. 38. 

Nouns in West Somerset Dialect Gram- 
mar, '77-9, 146. 

Nufi languages, '58, 117. 

NulliuSj origin of this genitive, *56, 
327. 

Numerals in Appa, Eregba, and Dsuku 
languages, '58, 119; in some Nufi 
languages, 117 sq.; in Yana, etc., 
121. 

in West Somerset Dialect, 

'77-9, 168 ; in Celtic and Gypsy, 
343 ; in spoken Swedish, 510. 
NOTman, '68-9, 426. 



Numerical, on the .logical use of 
(Socrates numerically different from 
Plato), by Prof. De Morgan, '59, 8. 

Nuntii^ not nunti^ correct form of the 
genitive, '67, 244. 

O'O, genitives in, should be substituted 
for many now printed ov^ toy, is^ 
in Homer, '55, 147-154. 



42 INDEX TO PROC. AND TRANS. PHILOLOG. SOC. 1842-79. 



o for a, forms in, as slondt lond, mon, 

for atandf land^ man^ are pure Friesian, 

'55, 253. 
0-, prefix in Norse, explained, '65, 71. 
Uy in Latin, one of the representatives 

of €, '67, 232 ; of w, 204. 
0, Norman and Early English, *68-9, 

372-4. 
o, &, and c, closely related in Greek, 

*62-3, 299. 
o sound, especially internal •, often 

changed to ue or uoy *62-8, 23. 
-» and '(OS, the Greek feminines so 

ending had a crude in m, '62-8, 

165-177. 
ohy Latin prefix, meaning 'down,' in- 
stances of, '67, 101. 
ti$ptfxos ; on its meaning as an epithet 

in Homer, 60-1, 250 ; in the later 

epic poets, 269. 
Obsordeacoy obsolescOy connection of, 

'67, 113. 
Obsoleacerey obsoletusy the etymology of, 

'64,131,132. 
Ocy prohabie pronunciation of in Latin, 

Ap., '67, 65. 
Oi8opum=o'(<nnroSi the MS. reading 

for oest/pum, given in the editions, 

'67, 204. 
Of, Norse prefix, discussed, '67, 104 ; 

0/ (O.E.) =«*, oby sub, 94. 
oi = (ee), Norman, '68-9, 396 ; Norman 

patois, 397 ; English patois, 397* 
oif io = (uu), Norman, '68-9, 403; om, 

uo, Norman and English, 400 : oi, 

oiy = (uu) and (ee), Norman and Eng- 
lish, 407 ; ot, ouy ex J «< = («) or (o), 

Norman and English, 409. 
Old-English how distinguished from 

the Anglo-SaxonandmcKiem English, 

'42-44, 65. 

Phonology, outlines of '67, 

357. 

publications in, during 

1876-7, '76-9, 4. 

ovofiayr theoretic older form of 6vofMT\ 
'67, 86. 

Onomatopoeia, course of the extension 
of meaning of words formed on this 
principle, '52-68, 143 ; the distinc- 
tion between, and natural sounds, 188. 

■ the probable origin of lan- 

guage, '44-6, 109 ; animals named 
from their peculiar cry, 110; the 
name of Hottentot whence derived, 
ib. ; cries of different animals, ib. ; 
inarticulate sounds peculiar to man, 
111; noises arising from the collision 
or fracture of bodies, ib. ; the final 
letters tenues ormedials as the sound 



is sharp or soft, 112 ; a final ah re- 
presents the noise of liquids — a 
guttural m, z, or r, the motion of 
air— and resonance generally is indi- 
cated by w, «, rtffy or /, ib. ; vowel 
broad or narrow as the sound is ^ave 
or high, ib. ; narrow vowels indicate 
diminution, 113 ; final ff changes to 
y to denote less intensity of action, 
f^. ; syllable repeated to denote a 
continuous sound, id.; /orr is some- 
times added for this purpose, whence 
the frequentatives in /, r, 1 14 ! fre- 
quentatives in t, 115; involuntary 
sounds may represent the feeling 
under which they are uttered, 116 ; 
or the accompanying action, 117. 

Onomatopoetic theory of speech, '78-4, 
12. 

Oppert, referred to, '58. 134, 142. 

Orcus (Horcus, Uragus), Etymology of, 
'67, 214. 

Ormulum, '62-68, 36, n 1 ; 42, sq. ; 275. 

Orthography, conventional spelling rare 
in the older language, 46-8, 1 ; incon- 
sistency of speUing arising trom 
mistakes as to the etymology, 2 ; 
the orthographical expedient termed 
eclipsis, as used in the Irish, in the 
Old French, in the Anglo-Saxon, 
etc., ib. ; apposition, 3 ; /iir, kt, 
Romaic representatives of b, rf, ib, ; 
the hard letters represented by a re- 
duplication of the soft ones, as in the 
Welsh/; 4 ; the Old English v used 
at the beginning, and u m the mid- 
dle of words, 5 ; the long quantity 
represented by a reduplication of the 
vowel, ib. ; the short vowel indicated 
by a doubling of the consonant, ib. ; 
the long vowel in late English or- 
thography indicated bv the mute e, 
6 ; and the short vowel ^y its absence, 
ib. ; or by a doubling of the con- 
sonant which precedes it, ib. ; Eng- 
lish vowels modified by the mute 
liquids, 7. 

English and Heterographers, 

'65, 13 ; French, 15. 

'78-4, 497 ; French 



and Latin, 78, 430; interpretation of 
old (Ellis), 433. 

Middle English, Mr. H. 



Nicol, '77-9, ix. 

the spelling of the words 



foreifftty sovereifftiy eoHeague, seems 
to be founded on a false notion of 
their etymology, '44-46, 67. 
Oscan words iUustrated from Celtic, 
'67, 148, fi. 1. 



I. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



43 



Otium, Aufrecht on the derivation of, 

*56, 143-144. 
Ovid*8 use of cot nix for corvus, *54, 107. 
Owl and Nightingale quoted, '62-8, 34, 

109. 

(bis), '68, 6. 

oy Diphthong, Mr. Ellis on, '67, 1 Ap. 

53. 
E and {, origin of the forms, and 

meaning of their names, '50-2, 5. 



* Pair' of Cards used in sense of 'pack,* 
'67, 66. 

Palace of Pleasure, quoted, '62-8, 
90. 

PalsBotype, or the representation of 
spoken sounds, for philolo^cal pur- 
poses, by means of the ancient types, 
^87, 1 Ap. 1. 

Palsgrave, quoted, '62-8, 104, 281. 

Palsgrave's *' Lesclardasementy''* date 
of publication of, '67, 41. 

Panini, '62-8, 117 sq. 

Paragoge, the term should be banished 
from grammars, '54, 206, 207. 

Paris' s, Gaston, method of editing, 
'73-4, 332. 

Par j any a, the Hindu God, Dr. Biihler 
on, '59, 154-68 ; etymology of the 
word. 161 ; identified with Perkunas, 
a Lithuanian God, 164. 

Participle : analysis of the present par- 
ticiple in the Indo-European lan- 
guages. Vide ' * Pormation of "Words,* * 
^46-8, 19. 

' Passion of our Lord, the,' a Middle 
Cornish poem, transcribed and trans- 
lated, '60-1, Appendix. 

Passive, how former in Sanskrit, '62-8, 
124. 

or Middle Voice, how formed, 

50-2, 57 ; Perfect in Latin, origin- 
ally an active participle, 68. 

Verbs, formation of, in the 



Latin and the Celtic Languages, '65, 
293. 

Passives in -r, in Celtic as well as in 
Latin. In the former, at least, this 
-r cannot have arisen from «, '65, 
293. 

Past, imperfect of Latin Verbs, how, 
'56, 3U9. 

Tater^ instances of, '60-1, 179. 

Faterz^Fatr in Plautus and Inscrip- 
tions, '67, 406. 

Patterson, A. J., on Hungarian, '78-4, 
216. 

Pause, important in English Verse, 
'62-8, 67, seqq. 



* 

Payagwl and the Payagwfts and Gua- 
ranis, a short account of, by C. B. 
Mansfield, with remarks oy Dr. 
Latham, *64, 229-33. 

Payagw& words, a list of (the first 
printed), by C. B. Mansfield, with 
remarks by Dr. Latham, '64, 229-33. 

Payne, Joseph; The Norman Element 
in the spoken and written English of 
the Twelfth, Thirteenth, and Four- 
teenth Centuries, and in our Provin- 
cial Dialects, '68-9, 352-449. 

Peacock, R. B. ; On some leading 
characteristics of Northumbrian, and 
on the Variations of its Grammar 
from that of Standard English, with 
their probable etymological sources, 
'62-8, 232. 

Glossary of Lonsdale Dialect, 

*67, 2 Ap. ; On some Leading Cha- 
racteristics of the Northumbrian 
Dialects, 2 Ap. 2 Pt. 

Pegu, the language of, its characteris- 
tics, '77-9, 74. 

Peile, J. , Report on Greek Philology, 
78-4, 226 ; Greek and Latin Etymo- 
logy reviewed, 299. 

Pennington, Mr., ailments for Greek 
accent discussed, '66, 119, etc. 

ireKKyjiywvy proposed reading for ireir- 
Xttydis, in Homer, '66, 179. 

Ter-y Latin Prefix, meaning "over," 
instances of ; theory of its 'origin, 
'67, 100. 

Perfect Tense, how formed in Latin, 
60-1, 179. 

Perfect First Active, formation of, in 
Homer, how limited, '65, 169. 

Perfect, Teutonic, preserves the root- 
vowel better than the Imperfect, 
'62-8, 19. 

Perfect Tenses in Gi;eek, on, '66, 1 68 ; 
use of, compared with their use in 
modem languages, 170 ; why often 
Active in form. Passive in meaning, 
173 ; new developments of, in the 
Attic Dialect, 174. 

Perfect passive participles of Latin, 
'66, 348. 

Fenwig and wig^ the derivation of, 
'59, 127. 

Perowne, J. J. S., on some English 
idioms, '66, 146-172. 

Persian army, movements of, before 
the Battle of Salamis, '62-8, 112. 

,/)=;t = e, '66, 353. 

Phaedrus, quoted, '62-8, 28. 

Phaednis, emendation of passages, '67, 

• 247. 

Pharyngal vowel change, '78-4, 469. 



44 INDEX TO PROC. AND TRANS. PHILOLOG. 80C. 1842-79. 



Philippe le Bel, called le fanx Monno- 
yeur, M, 2. 

Philippine Islands, languages and dia- 
lects of, '77-9, 104. 

Phillips* New World of Woids, 1657, 
notice of. *09, 261. 

Philological Magazines of Germany, 
brief notice of, '67, 241. 

Philological Society, ought to collect 
single etymologies, etc., '50-8, 89. 
Society's Work in 1876-7, 



by Mr. H. Sweet, '77-9, 1; in 
1877-8, by Mr. H. Sweet, 373 ; in 
1878-9, by Dr. J. A. H Murray, 
561 ; Articles of Association of, 
xxxiy. 

Philology, Comparatiye (Key), '78-4, 
398 ; changed scope of, 4 ; extent of 
inquiry, 3 ; recent research, 209 ; 
scientmc matter of, 6-30. 

English, Mr. H. Sweet, 

77-9, 3 ; the future of, Mr. H. Sweet, 
410 ; and Germanic, 376. 

Philosophy of language closely con- 
nected with the philosophy of mind, 
'46-8, 137; names either indiridual 
and proper, or general and common, 
ib. ; the way in which they assist 
the process of reasoning, ib. ; Mill's 
opinion on this subject examined, 
138; opinions ol Socrates and Plato, 
ib, ; the latter not a Nominalist, 
but an Idealist, 142 ; the germ of 
his system contained in the passage 
of the Phaedrus (24 5D seqq.) 
which teaches us, inter alia, to 
belieye in innate ideas, ib. ; Plato 
opposed the doctrine that owe know- 
lec^e is derived from sensation, 143 ; 
but did not altogether reject the 
eridence of the senses, ib. ; Nominal- 
ism wholly inconsistent with Plato's 
tenets, ib. : Plato, though a Realist, 
made use of general terms for logical 
purposes like a Nominalist, 145 ; 
the object of the Cratylus, 146 ; 
Plato's use of Etymology shows that 
he considered single woros as capable 
of declaring to a certain extent the 
essences of things, 148. 

Phonetic decay in the Accadian lan- 
guage, '77-9, 125, 139. 

development of language, 

'73-4, 461 ; notation, 462. 

spelling, attempts to intro- 



Phonology, interest to the philologist, 
'73-4,6. 

Physical constituents of accent and 
emphasis, '73-4, 113. 

Physiological cause of vowel -intensifi- 
cation, '73-4, 280. 

Pickens, quoted, '62-68, 92. 

Pictet. his notions respecting the con- 
stmction of the Welsh verb con- 
sidered, '48-60, 176 ; also his theory 
relative to the causative verb in 
Sanscrit and Irish, 179. 

Picts not a Teutonic but a Celtic 
race, '42-44, 120; nearly allied to 
the Welsh, ib. ; names of Pictish 
kings, t^.; the Pictish term peatm 
fahel considered, 121; St. Columba 
preached to the Picts through an 
interpreter, ib. ; names of places in 
the Pictish territory Welsh, 122, 
123 ; the Picts of Galloway, 123. 

Pitch of q[>eech sounds, '73-4, 125. 

Plancins, some remarks on Cicero's 
speech for him, '52-3, 139-42 ; jw/- 
lueere, use of, 183. 

Plato, tile passage in the Republic 
relating to the celebrated Number 
considered, '42-4, 81 ; the number 
appears to be the cube of 6 or 2 1 6, 
85 ; Plato seems to have looked 
upon numbers as types of the fixed 
and invariable, 88 ; assumes in the 
Republic that there are four cardinal 
virtues, three parts of the human 
soul and five kinds of government, 
ib. ; his reasons for introducing the 
present intricate calculation, 89 ; 
like fanciful speculations in his other 
writings, 90. 

Plautus, quoted, '62-3, 17. 22, 25. 

his accents, '68-9, 321, 

340. 



duce, '65 56. 
Phonetics, works on. 77-9, 8, 40. 
Phonology, Mr. H. Sweet, 77-9. 7, 392. 
— comparative study of, '73-4, 

33 ; progress of, 203, 462. 



Capt., '67, 661 ; MS. read- 
ing defended, 408; Glor., 27; 
Ritschl's emendation defended, 408. 

Playing-Cards, Glossary of Technical 
Terms relating to the manufacture 
of ; English, '67, 56, 63 ; French, 
59. 

Pleonastic use of the English pronoun 
personal before a proper name, '42-4, 
221 ; the pronoun precedes the verb 
and the proper name follows it, 222 ; 
cases in which the pleonastic pronoun 
follows the substantive with which it 
is in apposition, ib. ; the pronoun in 
the genitive, ** the knight his man. 
hoody etc., 223 ; both substantive 
and prbnoun in the same case, 224 ; 
a preposition before the substantive, 



I. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



45 



Pleonastic (continued) : — 

*^ of the king his eldest sonne," ib, ; 
pleonastic use of the pronoun per- 
sonal when coupled with the relative, 
ib. ; the pronoun the object of the 
verb. 225 ; the relative aad the per- 
sonal pronoun in the same case, ib. ; 
relative in one clause of a sentence 
and pronoun personal in the other, 
226 ; such phrases as conceal me what 
I am, etc., ib, 

ploroy Mr. H. Coleridge on it, and 
some of its compounds, *57, 129-34. 

Plural, formation of, in Sunda language 
of Java, '66, App. 8. 

Plural Forms in Latin with Singular 
Meanings discussed : e.g., Castra, 
Furcaf Bigae^ Caases^ Folles, Limina^ 
CurruSf Menta, *67, 106. 

Plurals of nouns in "West Somerset 
Dialect, '77-9, 146; in spoken 
Swedish, 600. 

Poetical Forms, philological value of, 
'67, 12. 

Poetry v. Logic, '62-8, 136, 142 ; and 
Music agree, 68. 

Poison, spiders named from, '69, 217-8. 
A Political Terms, L. Buc^er on, '68, 42 ; 
translation of, 42 sqq. ; international, 
44 ; neutralize, 46 ; prime minister, 
46 ; confide in, 46 ; fears and jea- 
lousies, 46 ; Conservative, 47 ; inte- 
grality, 47 ; intervention, 48 ; paci- 
Scation, 48 ; cabal, 49 ; reduce, 49 
ult'^ best interests of Europe, 60; 
responsible, 60 ; to be free to do, 
60 ; guaranty, 61 ; aristocracy, 62 ; 
consolidate, 64; require =cow^rflm- 
drcy 64 ; occupy, 66 ; public opinion, 
56 sqq. 

polleXj on the derivation of, by Th. 
Aufrecht, '69, 16. 

pollucere, use of, '62-8, 183. 

UoXvdfVKTis, on the derivation of, by 
Th. Aufrecht, '69, 17. 

Polynesia, languages of, '77-9, 89; 
Our Present Knowledge of the Lan- 
guages of. Rev. S. J. Whitmee, 424. 

Polynesian Languages. Vide Verb, 
'48-60. 

Polysynthesis : the great characteristic 
01 the North American languages, 
'48-60, 168; found also in the 
Basque and in the Mordwinian dia- 
lect of the Finnish, 160 ; not the 
result of philosophic contrivance, 
169 ; appears to have originated in 
a desire to be explicit, 160. 
Polysynthetic or polysyllabic latiguages, 
'62-8, 124. 



Poor, Bp., author of Ancren Biwle, 

'62-8, 36. 
Portuguese, their importation of our 

* disappoint ' '66, 296. 
pos, genuine form for post in Sallust, 

'67, 243. 
Possessive case of nouns in "West 

Somerset Dialect, '77-9, 166. 
Possessives, English in ea and Ais, '66, 

75. 
Postpositions, in Umbrian, '62-8, 173. 
Postpositive, defmite article in Swed., 

'62-8, 236. 
Pott, his criticism on Max Miiller's 

Turanian languages referred to, *68, 

127. 

Etymological researches, 

'73-4, 3 ; Wiirzel Worterbuch, 451. 
on force of -aic-, '62-68, 



119. 
Prefix system in S. African languages, 

'68, 109, seqq 
Prefixes and Suffixes in Malagasy, 

'77-9, 290. 
Prefixes, reason for the disuse of, for 

the formation of compound verbs in 

English, '67, 93. 
Prepositions, Bopp on, '62-8, 147, 

seqq. ; Key on, 149 ; and case-end- 
ings, 200. 
on some of the suffixes of 

Latin and Greek, '68-9, 296-311. 

prefixed to verbs, specially 



liable to curtailment, '64, 29 ; of 
different origin and power frequently 
assume an identity of form, 69 ; 
ayuy and its representatives, ad' m-, 
inter'f etc., cuscussed, 29-72; ivi, 
in, and related words, discussed, 
86-95. 

in "West Somerset Dialect, 



'77-9, 229. 

Present Tense, no element denoting 
time contained in, '67, 9. 

President's Address, 1876-7, by Mr. 
H. Sweet, '77-9, 1 ; 1877-8, by Mr. 
H. Sweet, 373; 1878-9, by Dr. J. 
A. H. Murray, 661. 

Prisoner's Prayer, '68-9, 104-107. 

Problems ana Principles of Lexi- 
cography, by Dr. Murray, '77-9, 573. 

Frocul =procu in. Plautus, '67, 408. 

Promptorium Parvulorum, '62-8, 87, 
90, 99, 107 sq. 

Pronominal roots not distinct from 
verbal roots, '62-8, 124. 

Pronoun the form of the reflective, 
'60-2, 65. 

repeated, referring to dif- 
ferent objects, in Latin, 62-3, 2. 



46 INDEX TO PROC, AND TRANS. PHILOLOG. SOC. 1842-79. 



Pronoims : in some lan^nages the pos- 
sessive pronouns are closely relatea to 
the genitiye of the personal, '46-8, 9 ; 
adjectives may have the same rela- 
tion to substantives, ib. ; formations 
in the Basque, Hungarian, and Fin- 
nish dialects, ib. ; in the Indo- 
European dialects, 11 ; the Greek 
fi^urr, 12 ; Greek adjectives in lot, 
€ioSf and ipos, ib. ; illustrations from 
the Burmese, Turco-Tartarian, etc, 
13 ; possessive pronouns fonned by 
the addition of the relative, ib.; 
examples of possessive pronouns 
formed from the personal in Arme- 
nian, Georgian, etc., ib. ; on the 
original forms of the pronouns, 67 ; 
the Ionic form of the interrogative 
pronoun beginning with t, ib. ; 
Tts and guisy ib. ; 6s may have had 
an initial K, 58 ; 6r and 6 iden- 
tical, ib. ; the definite article origin- 
ally a demonstrative pronoun, 59 , 
pronouns which begin with «, 61 ; 
the Latin il/e^ 63, may at one time 
may have had an initial guttural, 64 ; 
reasons for believing that the final of 
these pronominal forms was a nasal, 
65 ; supposed original form of the 

Eronoun, 67 ; its meaning seems to 
ave been first demonstrative, then 
relative, and lastly interrogative, 68. 
-^— — the doctrine, that in the 
Indo-European languages, "the no- 
minative singular of the first personal 
pronoun is from a different base from 
that from which the oblique cases 
proceed,'* impugned, '48>60, 25 ; 
the Ijatin ego may be connected with 
the Sanscrit eka^ one, and tu with 
the numeral duo, ib ; e/s connected 
with tmu8, 26 ; the initial m often 
interchanged with oi, which is again 
changed for egomet, suggested as the 
original form of the first personal 
pronoun, ib. ; suggestion that the 
German ich is tne same word as 
mich with the loss of the m, 31 ; that 
the last syllable of egomet is the 
English word mattj ib. ; the Slavonic 
initial in mnoyu mnge, may perhaps 

{)oint out the letter change which 
ed to the forms vos, vobis, etc., 32; 
the Sanscrit duoj two, probably ori- 
ginated the Latin tu and Gothic 
thUf 33 ; du before a vowel often 
becomes ^ whence we may get vos, 
etc., and by changing the to into b, 
the corresponding Greek pronoun, 
ib. 



Pronouns in West Somerset Dialect, 
77-9,174; Possessive, 182 ; Inter- 
rogative, 182 ; Relative, 183 ; Com- 
pound. 184 ; in Malagasy language, 
293 ; in spoken Swedish, 511. 

of the first and second per- 
sons, on the origins of, by Dr. C. 
Lottner, '59, 34-66, 285. 

and Roots, '82-3, 136 sqq. ; 



143, sqq. derived from ir«n = *see,' 

137. 
Pronoun repeated referring to different 

objects in Latin, '82-3, 2. 
Pronunciation of Norman and Early 

English, '88-9, 367. 
ascertainment of, '73-4, 25 ; 

of classical languages, 155 ; Early 

English, cf. Sounds, 207 ; Chaucer 

and Wordsworth, 296. 

ir. Writing, '82-3, 132, 232, 



of Greek and Latin by English 
Scholars, 73. 

Prosody, English, '73-4, 624. 

Prothesis, Bopp on, '62-3, 155. 

Provincial Woras conmion to more than 
one dialectic district are not corrup- 
tions, but legitimate inheritances, 
•87, 2 Ap. 2 Pt. p. 10. . 

Provincialisms and court-language, re- 
lative purity and value of, '52-3, 125. 

jP«, spf ks and «Ar, interchangeable, '54, 
209. 

Puck, on the origin of, '60-1, 17. 

PuLSZKY, Francis, on the Verbal 
Affixes in Hungarian, '59, 97-116; 
on the Nominal Affixes in Hun- 
garian, 117-124 ; his account of his 
interview with Mezzofanti in 1833, 
252-3. 

on the nature, peculiarities, 

and some affinities of the Hungarian 
language, '58, 21. 

Purjanya, the Hindu God, Dr. G. 
Biihler, on, '59, 68, 154 ; etymology 
of the word, 161 ; identified with 
Perkunas, a Lithuanian God, 164. 

Purists in Philology, '62-3, 3. 

Pylagoras, the duration of the office of 
the office of. '52-8, 58. 

PylaB, near ThemorpylaB, meetings of 
the Amphictyonic Council at, '52-8, 
52. 

Pynson's Contracts with Herman for 
his Vulgaria and* Palsgrave for his 
Lesclaircissement, togetnerwith Pyn- 
son's Letter of Denization, '67, 362. 

Pyrrhics, the accent of, 68-9, 335. 

Quantities, long, preserved in Plautus 
and the older writers, '67, 415. 



I. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS, 



47 



Quantity, '62-8, 67; in English, 

80, sq, 
consonantal, Danish, '78-4, 

110; in Teutonic languages, 485, 

606; Modern English, 521, 527, 

533. 

in spoken Swedish, '77-9, 



484. 
Que, instances of Ion? quantity in 

Latin Conjunction, '66, 67. 
Qnercus, its possible origin, '56, 322. 
Quichua, Report on, 1877-8, M. Von 

Boeck, '77 -9i 439. 

JS final dropt in archaic Latin prosody, 
'67, 405 ; transposition theory of, 73. 

sound of, '73-4, 108. 

pronounced like z by Parisian 

ladies in 16th century, '66, 22. 

J2, R. F. Weymouth, M.A., on, '62-3, 
264 ; R in German =« in Goth, 6 ; 
vowel (r) in Sanskr. 133 ; paragogic, 
i.e. interpolated after a, 268, 8qq.\ 
at times disappears, 272 ; changes 
place with vowel, 273 ; why replaced 
by w, 275 ; final apt to grow into 
m^ 277, sq. ; and n interchanged, 
280, aq. ; and d interchanged, 277 ; 
and/ interchanged apparently, 283, 
and I interchanged, 276. 

J2 and / change their places in words, 
'64, 209-310. 

M and n interchanged, '62-8, 277. 

R and 8 or z, interchanged, '62-63, 
278. 

R, in Norman, '68-9, 417. 

R, irt'j words derived from, '69, 132. 

Race, question of difference of, how 
affected by the discovery of the 
sister famibes of the Semitic, '60-1, 
123. 

Radicarians, theories of, '78-4, 27, 
249, 454. 

Rajna, Prof., an Italian dialects, '77-9, 
587. 

rak or rok, as a coarse guttural sound, 
and the words connected with it, '67, 
120-126. 

Rakheng, the language of Arracan, 
'77-9, 73. 

Ramsay's edition of Plautus's Mostel- 
laria commented on, '67, 410. 

Ramsbotham, Dr., quoted, '62-8, 
110. 

Rask, his hypothesis as to the mean- 
ing of the term »ar?/*, '44-6, 86. 

Raynouard, on Romance Languages, 
'73-4. 424. 

Re-f force of the Latin Prefix, '60-1, 
174, 197. 



Reciprocal or mutual action, how 
expressed in different languages, 
'42-4, 233 ; by means of the adverb, 
ib. ; of two nouns or pronouns, 
separate or compounded, 234 ; by 
using a reciprocal form of the verb, 
235 ; deponent verb, 236 ; in Ice- 
landic the middle verb is the active 
verb with a reflective pronoun, ib, 
sometimes took & reciprocal meaning, 
237 ; French reflective verbs with 
reciprocal power, 241 ; reciprocal 
power of the Greek middle verb, 
ib. 
Reduplicated forms in Latin and Greek, 
'62-3, 17, 213. 

Words in English, Dictionary 

of, '66, App. 1 ; in German, French, 
etc.. App. 10. 
Reduplication, theory of, '60-1, 179. 

in Malagasy language, '77-9, 

292. 

influence of, in the formation 

of languages, 66, App. 4. 
Relatives, Umbrian, '62-3, 181. 
Repeated pronoun in Latin referring to 

different objects, '62-3, 2. 
Reports, 1876-7: — 
' Courteille, Prof. P. de, on Turkish, 
54 ; Cust, K. N., on Lan^ua^es 
of the Indo Chinese Pemnsiua, 
etc., 72; Gallee, Dr. J. H., on 
Dutch, 16 ; Hiibschmann, Prof., 
on Armenian, 64 ; Leskien, Prof. 
A., on Lithuanian, etc., 44; 
Rosny, Prof. L. de, on Japanese, 
109 ; Tamm, Dr. F., on Swedish, 
30. 

1877-8 :— 

Boeck, M. von, on Quichua, 439 ; 
Tobler, Dr. L., on Swiss- German 
Dialects, 419; Whitmee, Rev. S. 
J., Our Present Knowledge of the 
Languages of Polynesia, 424. 
1878-9 :— 



Cust, R. N., on Korean, 613 ; Don- 
ner, Dr. 0., on Finnish and 
Lappish, 602; Rajna, Prof., on 
Italian Dialects, 587 ; Schiefner, 
Prof., on the languages of the 
Caucusus, 593. 
Rhf pronunciation of, '62-3, 268. 
Rhyme, introduction of, into Iceland, 

'66, 200. 
Rhymes, faulty, in modem Poets, '77-9, 
5*; Chaucer, 11*; in -ere, in 
Chaucer, Table of, 46*. 
Rhys, Mr. John, on the Passive Yerbs 
of the Latin and the Keltic Ian* 
guages, '66, 293. 



48 INDEX TO PROC. AND TRANS. PHILOLOG. SOC. 1842-79. 



Rhythm, English, '73^ 624 ; Eng- 
lish, French, Italian, and German, 



130. 



defined, '60-1, 45 ; present 
neglect of its principles in reading 
poetry, 62. 

Ribbeck's J ^ir<7i7 reviewed, '67, 198. 

Richardson's English Dictionary, no- 
ticed, '59, 269. 

Ridley, Wm., on the Kamilaroi Lan- 
guage of Australia, '55, 72-84. 

'Tthtts, Semi-Saxon = £nglish-/y, '62- 
8, 97. 

Ritschl's Plautus, Prof. Kev on, '60-1, 
172. 

Ritschl Opuscula Philologica, Dr. W. 
Wagner on. '67. 399. 

Ritson quoted, '62-3, 92. 

Robert of Gloucester, pronunciation of 
ere in, '77-9, 6*. 

Robson's Glossary to Metr. Romances, 
'62-8, 99. 

Roman numerals, Y, X, origin of, '67, 
Ap., 88. 

Romance Dialects, '78-4, 424 ; lan- 
guages, 407, 408. 

languages ; their relation to 

Latin, '60-1, 191. 

languages in their relation 



to Plautine prosody, '67, 407. 

Root, definition of, '^8-4, 25. 

Roots, Bopp on, '62-3, 135 sq. ; 
Miiller on, 136 sq. ; Pronominal, 
143 sqq. ; not of one and one only 
form, 3 ; yowel of Teutonic verb 
seen better in perfect than in im- 
perfect, 19. 

coincidence of, in European 

and African languages, '58, 36 ; re- 
semblances of, in remote languages, 
37 ; Hebrew and Anglo-Saxon, 

67. 

number of. '78-4, 28 ; Pott's 



great work on, 451. 
Rosen's work on the Sanskrit roots, 

'42-4, 33. 
Bosny, Prof. L. de, on Japanese, 1876-7, 

'77-9, 109. 
Roumanian dialects, '73-4, 415. 
Royster Doyster, quoted, '62-8, 101. 
Rugi and Rhaiti, the same people, 

'57, 8. 
Bunaway, a misprint for Rumour in 

Shakespere 'That Runaway's eyes 

may wink,' '59, 135-6. 
Runic inscriptions, '78-4, 444. 
Russell, Dr. ; Mr. "Watts on his Life 

of Cardinal Mezzofanti, '59, 227-66 ; 

his oversight about Mr. Watts's 

paper needs correction, 229. 



Russian, how related to other European 
languages, '50-2, 7 : has no article, 7. 

pronunciation, Mr. H. Sweet 

on, *77-9, 543. 

verbs, how arranged by 



Grvech and by Schmidt, '42-4 97 ; 
personal endings, 98 : formation of 
the preterite, present of the impera- 
tive and perfect of the imperative^ 
101 ; Russian verbs corresponding 
to those of the several Sanscrit con- 
jugations, 99 ; semel-factive verbsy 
101 ; iterative verbs, ib. 

vowels, how changed before 



certain gutturals. '42-4, 99 ; before 
certain palatals, ib. 

Ruth, Book of, in West Somerset 
Dialect, '77-9, 247. 

S dropt in French spelling, at what 
date ? '67, 77; final, dropt in archaic 
Jjatin prosody, 404. 

S, orifi^ of its form, '50-2, 3. 

S, initial lost, '62-8, 27-8; in Gothic 
=r in German, 6; a ti; sound in- 
terposed between a and e or o, 24 ; 
palatal in Sanskrit =c or i(r in West 
Europe, 122, 127. 

-«, final of Latin prepositions, '68-9, 
310; -s, -ss, -sse, -ce = (s) in Norman 
and English, 418, 440. 

ff or ffFy words requiring this prefix in 
Homer, tKvpos, '56, 139 ; rfivs, 140 
n. ; ieos, 140 «. ; ixdv, Ijceurros, 
140 ; ob, 01*, I, «$, 141, 140 n. ; 
'Hpa, 142. 

Saboean inscriptions, '78-4, 371. 

Sacae, '58, 130 sqq. 

Sackville, quoted, ^62-8, 88. 

Saho = Galla, a sister-familv of the 
Semitic, '60-1, 21. 

Salamis, on the Positions and Tactics 
of the contending Fleets at the Battle 
of, '52 3, 101-15. 

Sallust, Cat 20, 7; Jug. 63. 3, 
emended, '67, 242. 

Sanscrit or Devanagari alphabet, '50-8, 
83-88. 

Sanscrit, accent in, '78-4, 163; dis- 
covery of, effect, 21 ; grammar, 222; 
lexicons, 219; recent works on, 224 ; 
yowel increment, 303, 307; vowel 
intensification, 281. 

Sanskrit, antiquity of, '62 3, 116 sq. ; 
palatal 8 = c or k in West Europe, 
122, 127; causal verbs, 123 sqq., 
219; passive formation, 124; vowels 
/ and /r, 133 sq. ; alphabet, alleged 
superiority of, 134 ; locative, 143. 

feminine nouns in a, '52-8, 

166. 



I. IHBBX OP AUTHORS AND SOBJECTS. 



second preterite ed'am--iia, 

iu probable origin, '4£-4, 274. 

fiugment. Sea Augment. 

gtammttrB and dictionariBS 

compiled by EuropeanB, '42-4, 13 ; 
no pmjudice in tbe Bralimins against 
imparting a knowledge of tbe San- 
Bcnt langnagfl, 14 ; Sbeikh Feizi, 
15; tbe Jesuit miasion at Madnra, 
ib, ; tbe Vykcarana of Psnlinus a 
Bartbolom^o. 16 ; Hanileden, 16 ; 
college of Fort William founded, 17; 
Carey's gmmnmr, ii. ; Colebrooke's 
grammar, 18 ; Forster's grammar, 
20 ; Yates's grammar, 21 ; Asiatic 
Sodelj o£ Calcutta, ib. ; Sir W. 
Jones, ii. ; works of English scbolars 
vorked their way slowly on tbe con- 
tinent, 22 ; Professor Gbezy, ii. ; 
'Wilkins's grammar, it. ; grammais 
pubLisbed on tbe contineDt, 25 ; 
Frank's grammar, ib. ; Bopp's gram- 
mar, 26 ; his views vitb respect to 
the poiBosal endings, 29 ; with re- 
spect to dsriyation, 32 ; the author's 
own gramniar, ib. ; lisla of Sanscrit 
radicals giyen by Carey, and more 
partially by Wilkins and Forsler, 
33 ; Eoeen a work on tbe Sanscrit 
roots, ib, ; Westergaard'a, li. ; pa- 
pers relating to tbe Sanscrit language 
in Tarions literary periodicals, 34 ; 
the Amara Eusba translated, 3S ; 
author's own dictionarT, 36 ; gloss- 
aries added to Bnpp a edition of 
Iv'alus and Johnson's edition of cer- 
tain parts of tbe Hitopadesa, Maha- 
bharata and Meeha Data, 36. 

[ Sapphic stanza, the stmotnle of, '51, 
• 14. 
Baion, Anglo-, various words in, com- 

Sared with English, '63-3, 37 ; 
emi-, orO.E., 35; words in Ancren 
Riwle, 36, 39. 
'' Ssions, Eitent of their territory, '66, 
247,251; origin of their name, 250. 
Bavce, Prof, A. H., on Accadian 
Phonology, '77-9, 123. 

on Seicitio and AEsyrian 

philology, '73-4. 365. 

Sciillagi or leallenge, thu etyiaoloeT of, 

'sa-a, 36. 

Scandinavian languages, '73-4, 96, 
443. 
words in English, '69, 26- 



ScHLEQKL, A. W., his thcorj With re- 
spect to the case- endings and personal 
tcrminatioQa considered, '44-6, 165. 

— ■ — ~- and Fr. v. ; lileir view of 
tbe classea of languages discussed, 
'SS-3, 117-1'iS. 

Schmidt, his arrangement of tbe Eus- 
lian verbs, '42-4, 97. 

ScBOUBUKQE, Sir Robert, contribu- 
tions to the Philological Ethnography 
of South America, '46-B, 22S. 

a TocabnlaiT of the Maiong- 

kong dialect, '48-50, 217. 

Schucfabdt's" Vulgar Latin," utility 
of, '67, 407. 

Score, The Anglo-Cymric, by A. J. 
Ellis, F.H.S., 77 -a, 316; Dee of, 
321; Range of, 322;' Classes of, 
320; North Amerioan Indian Ver- 
aions of, 338, 359 ; Its origin and 
use, 340; Version of, 359. 

" Scot and Lot," on the phrase, '67, 
167; Smnmary of arguments, 194. 

Scott, qaot«d, '62-3, 158. 

Scribble, of Saxon, not of Latin or^in, 
'67, 378. 

Scythia: — nations bordering on Scythia, 
'42-4, 77; notions of Herodotua 
respectiDg the Crimea, ib. ; respeot- 
ine the Sea of Azov, 78 ; position 
or the Sarmatians. Badinions, 
GelDniBjia, Jureans, ThyssagelanB, 
revolted Scythians. Argipp^ana, 
Eyperboreana, Arimaanians and 
iMassagelana, ib. ; the three rivers 
described by Herodotua as east of 
the Borysthenes, 60. 

Scythian languages, the term criticised. 



167. 

Semitic family of 1: „ ^ , 
Heeled with the Aryan, 60-1, 1 
date of the separation from it of its 
sister families discussed, 123. 

languages, / and tluM in, 

'69, 47-9. 

; '73-4, 365. 

the, and their relations with 

the Indo-European class. PartL On 
tbe nature and development of Se- 
mitic roote, '64, 169-98. Fart II. 
On the connexion of Semitic roots 
with corresponding forms in the 
Jndu-Kuronean class of languages, 
238-261; list of Semitic and £iirn. 
pean words compared, 26' '^ 
comparison of the nanus 
things in the Senitifl ■ 
languages, 270-81. 



60 INDEX TO PROC. AND TRANS. FHIL0L06. SOC. 1842-79. 



Semitic nationa, '58, 141 sq. 
Semi-Towels, y, r (non-vibrant) v, 
. '82-3, 297. 
Servian language and its dialects, Mr. 

W. R. MorSl, '77-9, III. 
Setshnana language, '73-4, 187. 
Seven Seages, quoted, '62-3, 103. 
Shakespeare, emended and explained, 

'60-1, 133 ; illustrated, 18, 96, 97, 

99, 109. 
'62-3, 68 ; 0th. IV. 3. 6 ; 

Meas. for M. II. 2. 19 ; Haml. III. 

1. 79 ; Temp. II. 1, 104 ; Mids. N. 

Dr. IV. 1. 158; 2 Hen. 4, II. 4. 

158 ; Tam. of Shr. I. 2. 226. 

on the word galioto in, by 



H. Coleridge, '58, 123 ; All's Well, 
braid, 6;' Lear, galhwy 123, 197; 
Macbeth, ahard-born, 105. 
Shall and will, on the use of, '52-8, 
1-5. 

Shan language, '77-9, 80. 

Sharpe (S.), on certain fragments of 
orations in accusation and defence 
of Demosthenes respecting the money 
of Harpalus, '48-50, 39. 

' (D.) on certain Lycian in- 

scriptions copied by the Rev. E. 
Daniell, Edward Forbes, Esq., and 
Lieut. Spratt, R.N., '42-4, 193. 

Shemitic languages. See Genitive 
case. 

Sheridan's Dictionary,- 1780, notice of, 
'59, 267. 

Short syllables originally long re- 
appear with their original quantity 
under the influences of ' ictus ' only, 
'67, 206. 

Shortening of long syllables in Flautus, 
'67, 414. 

Si ' So,' '73-4, 52. 

iiszBo, in 81 dit placet, '59, 139. 

Siamese language, the characteristics 
of, '77-9, 82. 

Sibilant often replaces guttural, '62-3, 
24. 

Sidney, Sir P., his hexameters, '62-3, 
83; quoted, 101. 

Siegfried' s, Prof., Miscellanea Celtica, 
edited by, '67, 252; Stone-period 
in Britam, not coincident witn any 
stage in the existence of the Celtic 
inhabitants, 304. 

(the late) ; Miscellanea Cel- 
tica, edited by W. Stokes, Esq., '67, 
252. 

Sim'itH^sim-teiUj miteinem Schlage, 
67, 396. 

Sim, sin, of simplex, sineerus, etc., 
means unity, 50-2, 65. 



Simula simu in Plautus, '67, 408. 

Sister-families of languages. Dr. 
Lottner on, '60-1, 20-27, 112-132. 

Skeat, Prof., Collation of the Durham 
Ritual, 77-9, 51*; description of 
the MS. 55*; on Stevenson's edi- 
tion, 58* ; on Curmudgeon^ vii. 

on Early English, '78-4, 

245. 

Skene, his notion as to the origin of 
thePicts, '42-4, 119, 120. 

Slavonic dialects, the position occupied 
by them among the other languages 
of the Indo-European family, '50-8, 
7-12, 25-29 ; literature, the written, 
not the oral, is solely the result of 
Westeminfluence, 26 ; characteristics 
of both, 26, 27 ; race is divided into 
great branches, the eastern and 
western, 28. 

— — languages ; the position they 
occupy among the Inao-European 
dialects, '48-M, 225; the Slavonians 
identical with the Sarmatse of Pto- 
lemy and the Scythians of earlier wri- 
ters, ib. ; * 'theyoungestof allnations" 
in the time oi Herodotus, 226 ; the 
same title may be applied to them 
at the present day, ib. ; in terms 
indicating relationship, the Russian 
approaches nearer to the Sanscrit 
than any of the related languages, 
228 ; also in its numerals, 229 ; the 
Russian, like the classical languages, 
synthetic, 230; but some of its 
forms appear to belong to a late 
period, ib. ; perhaps it may be con- 
sidered of later origin than the 
classical, but of earlier origin than 
the modem languages of Europe, 
231 ; change of the latter from the 
synthetic to the analytic class, ib. ; 
Slavonic races :^-ori^nal area occu- 
pied by them, 187 ; Jazyges, a Slavish 
race on the Theiss in the time of 
Ptolemy, 189 ; Daci, east and west 
of them, and therefore probably 
Slavonic races, 190 ; the Daci ex- 
tended to the Morawe, where the 
Moravians are now settled, ib. ; 
ar^^uments advanced to prove the 
existence of ancient German settle- 
ments in Bohemia considered, 191 ; 
Slavonic races in the Cimbric Cher- 
sonesus in the ninth century, 215 ; 
also along the right bank of the 
Elbe, ib. ; and in Alt-marle, 216 ; 
the testimony of the Latin historians 
as to early German settlements be- 
tween the Vistula examined, 217. 



I. INDEX OF AUTHOES AND SUBJECTS. 



51 



Sloane, G., on the connexion of 
Pope Gerbert with the Geometry 
of Boethius, '48-60, 163; further 
observations on the Geometry of 
Boethius, 269. 

Slug, its primary meaning, '60-1, 106 ; 
Slugs and Snails, on the names of, 
102. 

Smith, Sir T., on the pronunciation of 
the EngUsh «, '77-9, 18*. 

Smith, Dr. Adam, his theory of the 
first formation of language confirmed 
by the Chinese, '60-1, 5. 

So, usedfor "if,'"73-4,62. 

ffo, in Greek akin to a guttural, '62-3, 
14. 

Somerset, West, Grammar and Dialect, 
Mr. F. T. Elworthv, '77-9, 143. 

Sons, Aufrecht on the derivation of, 
'66, 115. 

Sora (in the kingdom of Naples), Re- 
marks on a Latin inscription of the 
first half of the seventh century, 
'62-3, 179-187. 

Soror^ 8oro in Plautus, *67, 406. 

Sound, difficulty in representing '78-4, 
12, 162 ; phonautographic curves, 
114; recording instrument, 389; 
relation of thought to, 5, 16, 30. 

units, '78-4, 121. 

— ^-^ and Hght, relation of words 
denoting, '68, 6. 

Sounds and Forms of Spoken Swedish, 
Mr. H. Sweet, '77-9, 467. 

-^— changes, laws of, '78-4, 459, 
466-477 ; English, History of, 461 ; 
transition of, articulation, 320, 522; 
gutturals, etc., 471. 

South America ; contributions to its 
ethnography, '46-8, 228 ; vocabu- 
lary of the Guinan language, 231 ; 
its affinities with the other American 
dialects, 236. 

South- Sea Islands, specimen of the 
Neugoue, Mai, Gera, Bauro, and 
Maori dialects of, '69, 83. 

Space, notion of ; relation between it 
and the pronominal notions, '69, 
67-66. 

Spain and France, on the ancient lan- 
guages of, '66, 155-184. 

Spanish and Portuguese literature, 
'73-4, 418. 

— — octosyllabic verse, '62-3, 
72. 

Specimens of West Somerset dialects, 
'77-9, 238 ; of spoken Swedish, 
631 ; of the Society's Dictionary, 
622, Ix. 

Speech sounds, study of, '73-4, 5, 



33, 117, 469 ; Visible (Bell's), 78, 

463. 
Spelling reform, '77-9, 9. 
English, plea for reform in, 

'67, 318. 



futility of instituting com- 
parisons solely according to, '67, 
1 Ap. 2. 

Spengel, A., his merits in Plautine 
criticism, '67, 421. 

Spenser quoted, '62-3, 90, 103. 

Spiders, Dr. Adams on the names of, 
'69, 216-227; which are generally 
taken from, 1, poison ; 2, weaving, 
217. 

Spoken and vmtten language, '62-3, 
132, 232. 

'8t in Norman, '68-9, 417. 

St. Alexis, G. Paris's edition, '73-4, 
428. 

Stammering,figurative derivations from, 
'60-1, 30. 

Statins, quoted, '62-8, 28. 

Statute, mistranslation of bullion in, 
'68, 1. 

Stercus, CKup, Skr. sakrHt, on the deri- 
vation of, '64, 167. 

Stevenson's edition of Durham Ritual, 
'77-9, 58*. 

Stewart, Chronicles of Scotland, '62-3. 
103, 109. 

Stewart, Dugald, quoted, '62-3, 129. 

Stokbs, Whitley : A Cornish Glos- 
sary, '68-9, 137-260; A Note on 
Endlicher's Gaulish Glossary, 251-4 ; 
The Accusative Plural in the British 
Languages, 255-6 ; Suffixes of Greek 
and Latin Prepositions, 295-311. 

Eemarks on a lately pub- 
lished Middle-Breton Mystery, '67, 
22; the Middle-Breton Irregular 
Verbs, 114. 

Notes on Comparative Sjm- 



tax, '60-1, 168; on the Third Per- 
son Sing. Imperative Act. in Cornish, 
177; Cambrica, 204-49, 288-93; 
*The Passion,* a Middle-Cornish 
Poem, transcribed and translated. 
Appendix. 

Stone-henge, the etymology of the 
word, '62-3, 31-35. 

Stratmann, Dr. F. H., an Outline of 
Old English Phonology, '67, 357. 

Stress in spoken Swedish, '77-9, 490. 

' Strong ' Preterite in Latin and Ger- 
man, formation of, '67, 6. 

Sub, originally means t^, 'M, 60^ ^ 
power shown when prefixed to ti 
etc., 61 ; how it come» to i 
under, 62-4. 



52 INDEX TO PROC. AND TRANS. PHILOLOG. SOC. 1842-79. 



Subjiinctiye and Indicatiye. connecting 
vowel short in both, in Early Greek, 
'62-3, 298. 

Substantives, inflexions of, in spoken 
Swedish : Gender, '77-9, 497; Case, 
498 ; Number, 600. 

SufSxes of Greek and Latin Preposi- 
tions, '68-9, 295-311. 

value of, '78-4, 301. 

' -ec and -etf in Latin equiva- 

lent, '62-3, 14. 

Sumatra, lang:ua^es of, '77-9, 99. 

Superlative, sumxes, '62-3, 10 ; in 
Umbrian, 175. 

Supine in -ium, in Umbrian, '62-3, 
184 ; not passive in Latin, 124. 

Surrey, quoted, '62-3, 87. 

Susians, proposed name for the nation 
using the second Achsemenian cunei- 
form, '68, 134 sq., 139. 

Swahili language, '77-9, 312 ; and 
Malagasy, 313. 

Swedish language, '73-4, 96; philo- 
logy, 445. 

Beport on, by Dr. F. 

Tamm, '77-9, 30 ; grammars, dic- 
tionaries, 39 ; dialects, 42 ; sounds 
and forms of, Mr. H. Sweet, 467; 
difference between the written and 
spoken language, 468 ; vowels in, 
461, 473 ; consonants in, 468, 478 ; 
vocality of consonants in, 484 ; quan- 
tity in, 484 ; stress in, 490 ; intona- 
tion in, 495 ; inflexions in, 497 
articles in, 505 ; adjectives in, 506 
numerals in, 510 ; pronouns in, 511 
verbs in, 517. 

relation of to Danish, '67, 



337. 

Sweet, Henry, the history of th in 
English, '68-9, 272-88. 

Presidential Address, 1876-7, 

'77-9, 1 ; 1877-8, 373 ; on the work 
of the Philological Society, 1876-7, 
1 ; 1877-8, 378 ; on English Philo- 
logy* 3, 410 ; on phonology, 7, 392 ; 
English and Germanic philology, 
376 ; dialectology, 398 ; sounds and 
forms of spoken Swedish, 457 ; 
Bussian pronunciation, 643 ; on 
gender in the Teutonic lansfuages, 
xi ; syntax of spoken Swedish, 626. 
on Germanic and Scandina- 



vian philology, '73-4, 439 ; English 

sounds, histoiy of, 461. 
Swift's letter on English, noticed, '57, 

263. 
* Swimming,' on words denoting, by 

Prof. T. H. Key, F.R.S., '62-3, 

14. 



Swiss German dialects. Dr. L. Tobler^ 
'77-9 419. 

Syllabi^, Chinese, '73-4. 346. 

reputed to be lengthened by 

arsis and ceesura only, were in certain 
instances originally long, aquild, 
ffravia, virgintSf nulliuSf fatigamus^ 
ohluimur, '67, 208 ; invariably, 209, 

Syllabification, '73-4, 1 22. 

Synkope, certain instances of, '54, 
201-206. 

Symphonesis, '73-4, 13. 

Szab6 (J.), on the descent of the 

Syntax, of spoken Swedish, '77-9, 626. 
Magyar from the ancient Persians, 
'42-4, 127. 

SzECHENTi, Count, his innovations in 
Hungarian, '58, 34 sq, 

T=c, '62-3, 7; 14, 213 sq. (confer 

228); ^=r, 228; t=n, 8; no part 

of compar. or superl. suffix, 10; 

a=/3, 27 ; TT = <r(r, 14. 
T final dropt in archaic Latin prosody, 

'67, 405. 
't in Norman, '68-9, 416. 
Tamen=^tQme and tarn in archaic 

Latin, '67, 408. 
Tamm, Dr. F., on Swedish, '77-9, 30. 
Tavoyee (or Taneagsari) language, 

77-9, 76. 
Telegram, a disfigurement to English, 

'58, 34 ; similar malformations in 

Himgarian, 34. 
Tennyson, Prof. Mayor on the Metres 

in, '77-9, iv. 
Terence, quoted, '62-3, 2, 28, 138. 
his law of accent, '68-9, 

317, 319, 321. 
Terminations, E. -cA, -lla^ 'ly^ -lok, 

L. -liy G. -\iK- ; Wedgwood on, 

'66, 175-178; English, Key on, 

229-250 ; Latin, represented by the 

Keltic agh or ach, Key on, 295-364 ; 

•tiay 'tioy Aufrecht on, 144-146. 
Termination, masculine, er, '62-63, 16. 
Teutonic languages, their connexion 

with Keltic, '67, 39-92; Teutonic 

and Keltic races mixed in England, 

88. 

' gender in, Mr. H. Sweet, 

'77-9, xi. 

representatives of the prefix 



ova in, '54, 44-60. 

vowel changes, '73-4, 286, 




600; quantity, 484, 606 ; 

439 ; words, old and middle forms, 

642. 
Texas, languages of, '56, 100. 
Texts, methods of valuing, '73-4, 333. 



I. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



53 



th, the history of, in English, '68-9, 

272-288. 
Th, initial, how sounded in English, 

'67, 82. 
-eA, plural in, '60-1, 301, App. I. 
Th, e, and «, distinction of, ^73-4, 636. 
Than, Mr. D. P. Fry, on, '69, 151-4 ; 

its change from then prohahly oc- 
curred hetween a.d. 1668 and 1678, 

'59, 163. 
The Vertuleii of the Sora Inscription, 

'52-3, 186. 
Theiner, Dr. A., notice of his sketch 

of Mezzofanti, '59. 241 ; translation 

of part of it, 263-6. 
Themistocles, the true estimate of the 

causes of his success at Salamis, 

'52-3, 116. 
Thing, and its hase, the, on an un- 
registered sense of, '59, 126-6. 
Thirlwall, the Rt. Rev. C, Lord 

Bishop of St. Davids, on the name 

Welsh and the word Aqua, '60-1, 

199. 
Thou and there connected or identical, 

'59, 61. 
Though =itanquam and tamen, '73-4, 

636. 
Thought, relation to sound, '73-4, 7, 

30 ; translation into words, 8. 
Three score years and ten, solemnity 

and heauty of the phrase, first used 

hy Coverdale.'62-8, 7. 
Tihou language (Soutii Africa), Voca- 

hulary of, '55, 196, 196. 
Timhuctti language, on the Kissour, 

Sungai, and Timhuct(i, Yocahularies 

of the, '50-2, 73-6. 
Timmani lan^age, '58, 108, 110 sqq. 
Tmesis, a curious one in Anglo-Saxon 

and Early English syntax, '50-2, 

97-101. 
the term should he hanished 

from grammars, '54, 207. ; 
To (O.E.) =8ia, German zer, '67, 93. 

— Gothic du, German zu, one in origin 
with at, Gothic at, O.G. az, '54, 
85-88. 

— the sign of the infinitive, found in 
no other Teutonic language than the 
Old Friesic, '55, 260. 

Tohler, Dr. L., on Swiss Germanic 

Dialects, '77-9, 419. 
Topsell, Hist, of Beasts, quoted, '62-3, 

106. 
Towneley Mysteries, quoted, '62-3, 91; 

102 n. 2. 
tr, words derived from, '59, 138. 
Trado, from tran rather than trans^ 

'67, 102. 



Translation, requisite of, as to verse, 
'62-3, 71. 

Transposition of consonants, '73-4, 
474. 

— "^— of liquid and vowel, the imi- 
tative origin of words concealed hy, 
'67, 10. 

Tranquillm, Prof. Key on, '59, 138.. 

Tp-€x-(w) =CMrr-w-(M/Mw), '67, 16. 

Tree, its representative in Greek and 
Latin, '56, 320, 321. 

Trench, Dr., his etymology of «>»?/- 
ward, '62-3, 108 ; on language and 
man, 142. 

Triconsonantal stems in Hehrew, not 
elemental, '58, 63 ; formation of, 
68. 

Triliteral roots, derivations from the 
simple type of a consonant, vowel, 
and consonant, '46-8, 130 ; the 
Latin verhs epargo, mergo, tergo, 
vergo, 131 ; the English verhs wafk, 
talk, hark, pluck, 132; the verhs 
grow, strew, throw, 133 ; parallel 
forms in the Greek and Latin, 134. 

Triliteral Semitic roots, on their 
formation, '60-1, 118. 

Trithen, Dr., on the origin of Greek 
Hermes, '46-8, 201. 

Trithen, F. H., on the position oc- 
cupied hy the Slavonic Dialects 
among the other languages of the 
Indo-European family, 'w-50, 225, 
'50-2, 7-12, 25-29. 

on the structure of the Rus- 
sian verb, '42-4, 96 ; on the forma- 
tion of the past tense in certain of 
the Indo-European languages, 273. 

Trus and begone, on the phrase, by 
H. Wedgwood, '59, 74. 

f«, words derived from, '59, 133. 

Tschudich, or Finnish languages. Vide 
Verb. 

Tumali language. Vide African Lan- 
guages. 

TwiTT-, T€iv, for TWIT, TCI', afford a 
natural symbol of duration of time, 
'67, 5. 

Turanian class of languages, '58, 21, 
127. 

r, '73-4, 376. 




Turkish, '62-3, 8 ; 3rd pers. pron., 8. 

dictionaries, '77-9, 66. 

Report on, 1876-7, by Prof. 

P. de Courteille, '77-9, 64. 
TuTSHEK (L ), on the Tumali alphabet, 

'48-50, 138 ; his vocabulary of the 

Fazoglo language, 139. 
(Dr. Lorentz),on the Tumali 

language, '46-48, 239. 



54 INDEX TO PROC. AND TRANS. FHILOLOO. SOC. 1842-79. 



ivfelve, on its termination {lika) in 
Lithuanian, '57, 29-32. 

M, Norman and Early English, '68-9, 
374-384 ; lit, tM, itr, yw, Norman, 
401 ; WfCu; oe, eo, Norman, 402 ; 
II, iVf ifo, iuerieUy ieio, English, 403. 

va8cs, peculiarity in the quantity of, 
'65, 95. 

TJlphilas, cited, '62-8, 8. 

Umhrian language, F. W. Newman on, 
'62-8, 167; ahlatiye abs., 184; de- 
clension of nouns, 202 ; gerund, 197 ; 
infinitiye, 198 ; nouns, 202 ; parti- 
ciple in tO', 184; postpositions, 
173, 197 ; pronouns, 198 ; relatives, 
181 ; superlatives in -mo, 175 ; su- 
pine, 184 ; verbs, 184, 194. 

Umlaut, analogy of, '78-4. 313. 

in Swedish, '77-9, 52. 

Uh; prefix in English explained, '65, 
62 ; German prefix explained, 70. 

the prefix to English verbs, 

not the same as that to adjectives, 
etc., '54, 48, 49. 

-unge, 0. Eng. adverbs in, '62-8, 97. 

'ungoy A. -Sax., '62-8, 94 sq. ; -ungoy 
A. -Sax., 95. 

Universal character, attempts at in- 
venting, *65, 38 /}. 1. 

Universities, study of English at the, 
'77-9, 12. 

unter-, meaning of the prefix in Ger- 
man, '54, 58. 

usurpare, on the derivation and mean- 
ing of, by Prof. Key, '55, 96-103. 

-i/X-, Greek, '62-8, 166. 

Utah, languages of, '56, 196. 

Varieties, accidental, of form, used for 
different shades of meaning, '62-8, 
218, 300. 304. 

Yeda, the Hig-, translation of its three 
Hymns to Far janya, '59, 156-8. 

Vedas, the, '62-8, 115. 

Yegetium, Sallust apud, '62-8, 28. 

Veitch's List of Irregular Verbs, Prof. 
Maiden on, '65, 175. 

Very German prefix, and its allied 
form examined, '67, 93. 

Yeragua, languages of, '56, 115. 

Yerb : its formation in Tschudish or 
Finnish languages, '48-50, 16 ; in 
the Mordwinian the verbal forms are 
clearly polysynthetic, 16 ; in certain 
tenses of the W otiak and Tcheremes- 
sian verb, the endings closely resem- 
ble the suffixes, which nouns assume 
as equivalents for the possessive 
pronouns, 17 ; in the Hungarian 



these two classes of endings almost 
identical, 19 ; opinions of the Hun- 
garian grammarians M&rton and 
£ev&y on this subject, t^. ; the im- 
perfect, perfect, and future tenses 
of the Hungarian verb formed on 
modifications of the present, perfect, 
and future participles, 21 ; these 
participles appear to be ablative or 
locative cases, and therefore when 
they take the pronominal suffixes, 
there is a case ot double attribution, 
as in the Burmese and Tibetan, ib. ; 
the Caucasian languages appear to 
be connected with the Finno-Tar- 
tarian, 21 ; the Georgian verb con- 
sists of an abstract noun combined 
with particles and pronouns, ib. ; 
the pronoun may be prefixed or in- 
fixed, t^. ; it has the forms of the 
oblique cases, 22; the pronominal 
elements of the Abchassian verb are 
also in the oblique cases and identical 
with the pronominal prefixes of the 
noun, 23 ; Polynesian language, 95 ; 
the Fejee verb may be formed by a 
noun in construction with an oblique 
pronominal suffix, t^. ; in Tagal& 
the pronominal element appears 
sometmies as a nominative, some- 
times as a genitive, 96 ; in the former 
case the verbal base is a nomen 
actoriSy in the latter a nomen actionis 
vel passionisy ib. ; in transitive con- 
structions the second of these two 
forms Ib generally used, 97 ; the 
Malagasy verb, m what points it 
resembles the Tagal&, ib. ; the 
opinions of Koorda and of W. Hum- 
boldt, with respect to these verbal 
forms examined, 99 ; the notion that 
the formative prefixes confer the 
verbal character untenable, ib. ; 
South American languages, 166 ; the 
personal endings of the verb agree 
with the oblique cases of the pro- 
nouns in the Lule, Araucanian, 
Moxan, Maipurian, and Mixtecan, 
166 ; the same construction found 
in the Maya, ib, ; W. Humboldt's 
remarks on this construction, ib, ; 
North American languages all formed 
upon the same principle, 157 ; poly- 
synthetic character of the verb, 158; 
in the Massachusetts and the Dela- 
ware languages, the personal endings 
of the verb the same as the possessive 
pronouns in the inseparable form, ib, ; 
the same holds good in the Gree, 
169; and in the Greenland and 



I. INDEX OF AUTHOKS AND SUBJECTS. 



55 



Verb {continued) : 
Esquimaux, save that in the latter 
the yerbal formatives are postfixed 
and the possessive pronouns are pre- 
fixed, 159; in the same language, 
by affixing, prefixing, or infixing 
certain particles, etc., the action of 
the verb may be modified, or in 
other words, different moods and 
voices may be formed to an almost 
unlimited extent, 161 ; verb sub- 
stantive, not essential to a logical 
proposition, 233 ; in the Coptic the 
pronoun demonstrative or indefinite 
frequently substituted for it, 234; 
or the suffixes of the personal pro-, 
nouns are combined with particles 
of time and space to modify tne sense 
of the phrase, according to the cir- 
cumstances, t^. ; the use of the per- 
sonal pronoun for the verb substan- 
tive occurs in the Hebrew, the 
Basque, the Turco-Tartaric, and in 
various American languages, 238 ; 
attempt to prove the identity of the 
roots t«, was^ and be^ 87 ; the 8 of 
18 often lost, ib, ; traces both in the 
German and the Celtic tongues of a 
final dental appertaining to the verb 
to be, 89 ; tne Celtic verb which 
seems to answer to the German verb 
tpeeen often loses its sibilant, 91 ; 
the interchange between & b, a. to, 
and an open vowel common in lan- 
guage, to. ; speculations as to the 
etymology of the verb is, 92. 

Verb, its analysis, '46-8, 169; the 
verb ex necessario a complex term, and 
therefore no primary part of speech, 
160 ; popular notion that the sub- 
ject of a verb must be a nominative, 
ib. ; the terminations of the verb 
generally pronouns in regimine, 161 ; 
examples from the Syriac and Fee- 
jee, ib. ; the verb properly a term 
of relation or predicate, in gram- 
matical combination with a subject, 
162; it may consist of an abstract 
noun combined with a pronominal 
subject in regiminey or of a parti- 

• ciple in construction with a subject 
in the nominative or some other case, 
ib. ; the verbal endings in Coptic 
identical with the pronominal suf- 
fixes of nouns, 163 ; as the latter 
are certainly oblique cases, so pro- 
bably are the former, ib. ; the stiiic- 
ture of the verb obscured in the 
Shemitic languages by euphonic* 
changes, 183; the personal endings 



of the preterite generally but erro- 
neously considered as abridged forms 
of the pronouns in the nominative 
case, ib. ; some of the endings of the 
Ethiopic perfect identical with the 
pronominal suffixes of nouns, 184 ; 
m other verbal forms we have the 
infinitive (really an abstract noun) 
united with these suffixes in all the 
persons, ib. ; analysis of the verb in 
the Indo-Chinese languages, 213 ; 
in the Burmese, verb and subject 
alike take a postfix, and thus furnish 
us with a kind of double attribution, 
I*. ; the Tibetan verb, 214 ; in the 
Basque, as in the Burmese, there is 
a double regimen^ ib. ; the Tartar 
languages generally have the pro- 
noun in the nominative, while the 
verb takes postfixes equivalent to 
case infiexions, 215 ; construction of 
the verb in Japanese, ib. ; and in 
Eastern Turkish, 216; general state- 
ment, 217. 

on the nature of, particularly 



the formation of the middle or pas- 
sive voice, *60-2, 51-70. 

not the roots of all language, 



'52-3, 205. 

uniting the double sense of 



<*an act," and '^the causing such 
act," '55, 7. 

in Umbrian, '62, 184. 

in West Somerset Dialect 



weak, '77-9, 185 ; stirong, 190 
formation of simpls tenses of, 191 
auxiliary, 196 ; passive voice, 223 
in spoken Swedisn, 617. 
Versification :— three qualities of sound 
used as elements of musical composi- 
tion, time, tone, and loudness, or 
stress of voice, '46-8, 96; under 
certain circumstances loudness and 
length are generally united, and 
under other circumstances loudness 
and acuteness of tone, 97 ; time an 
element of English verse, 99 : Greek 
accent is tone, English accent more 
stress of voice, 101 ; musical notes 
and verses are alike divided into 
portions of equal time, 102; in 
music each measure begins, and in 
verse each metre either begins or 
ends with the stress, ib. ; in English 
all syllables are considered of equal 
length, and the feet are measured by 
the number of syllables, 103 ; the 
ictus metricus, 104 ; confusion 
arising from Bentley's use of the 
term arsis and thesis, ib. ; rules which 



56 TtTDEX TO PROC. AND TRAKS. FHILOLOO. 80a 1842-79. 



Teraiflcation (eontiittud); 
regulate the positioii of the »ti:««a in 
Greek Terse, 105; in Greek verse 
tlia strees did not necessarily full an 
a paitaculai- sellable of a word as ia 
English, lOS ; EngllBh vrriterB occa- 
sionAllf shift theii accent or streea, 
and in French Terse the same liberty 
ia taken without scruple, ii. ; the 
modem Greeks, unlike the ancient, 
generallj place the tone and stress 
on the same syllable, 109 ; Tersus 
politici, ItO. 



G., 






I of 



BefleiiTe Pronouns in Icelandic, '' 

80. 
on the word It(inbend& or 

Etmhenda, and the introdnction of 

Bhyme into Iceland, 'Sfi, 200. 
YillehiirdoDin, U. de Wailly'a edition, 

'78-4, *26. 



Tirgil's heiameteis, accent in, 'T3-4, 
3S. 

Tirgil's misuse of cormu and eamix, 
'54, 108. 

Tirgil, Eel. x. SO. emended, '67, 204; 
i. 396. discussed, Aen. It. 436. dis- 
cussed, 201; Bodleian MS. men- 
tioned in Eibbect's Prolegomena, 
p. 361 ; Letter from Prof. Coning- 
ton on, 539 ; Minor Poems ; colla- 
tion of MS. (Cod. Hail. 2584) 236 ; 
emendationa in, 224. 

*ii for voiii or jiil{i)i, not from ulit, 
'67, 410. 

"Tooabnlar Parodies"; term suggested 
by Mr. H. Coleridge, Ei Tour 
nerilship, '60-1, 3B. 

Tocabulartes of Appa, Eregba, and 
Dsukn, '5S, 119, 120; of some 
Konri languages, 116; of someNnfi 
langua^, 117. s;. 



Voice, scientific 






ations c 



, '78-4, 



Towel defined, '62-3, 265; e 



Towela in Aecadian language, "77-9, 
127, 132. 

in Old English : their equira- 

lenbi in the old Teutonic Lanenoees, 
•67, 367. 

consonantal power of, '78-4, 

347 ; dropping of, French and 
Chinese, 347 ; sounds, change of, 
271, 239; classification of, 465; 
Danish, 101 ; English, irregularitieB, 
606 ; Middle, 497, 508 ; Modern, 
610,515; Old, 486; French labials, 
old, 77; Latin and Teutonic, 77; 
notation of, 464 ; production of, 
lis. 



131, iqi- ; sounds in Eng., 269; 
Terbs in Latin and Greek, Bopp 
on, 125. 

increment and gradation, 

7S-4, 299, 300, 305, 312 ; intensifi- 
cation and weakenings, 276, 277, 



fr, sound apt to doTelope itself (esp, 
after «) before o or e, 'Ba-S, 24. 

Wager of Law originally meant a 
finding of pledges to abide some 
mode of tnal, '42-4. 68 ; in this 
country used in reference to one 
mode of txial only, and hence ths 
secondary meaning which attaches 
to it in the language of the English 

Waonbb, Dr. W., on some modem 
Greek words, '67, 85 ; on Ribbeck's 
Virgil, 198; on Jordan's Sallost, 
241 ; on Phaedrus, 246 ; on the 
use of the word fUrca in Plautus, 
250 ; Four Metrical Inscriptions 
reprinted from the "Hermes,'' 260; 
on some disputed points of Plautine 
prosody, 399. 

on Modem Greek, '73-4, 

382 ; report on Latin philology, 
229. 

Wahn, prefix in German explained, 
'68, ii ; Wan, preEi in Dutch 
explained, 71 ; E^liah, explained, 
72. 

Wales, a Tocabulary of the Oower 
dialect, '4S-M, 222. 

the traces of Gaels before 

Evmry accounted for, '9S, 17j. 

Walker's Dictionary, 1791, notice of, 

'6B, 269. 
Waltbus, Rei J., on the derivatiTce 

of the Welsh word ^aj/, '42-4, 

65. 



-wards. 


Eng.te 


nninab 


on, '62-3, 96. 


Waterf 


wl, on 


words 


denoting, by 


Prof. 


T. H 


Kay, 


F.E.S., ■62-3, 



I. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



67 



"Watts, Thomas, on an early trans- 
lation or rather analysis of the 
lihavagat Purana, '46-8, 129 ; on 
the written languages of China, 
219. 

— — — on the Deyanagari or San- 
scrit alphabet, *60-2, 83-88 ; on 
the extraordinary powers of Cardinal 
Mezzofanti as a linguist, 111-125. 
— On some Philological Pecu- 



liarities in the English Authorized 
Version of the Bible, (Coverdale's 
"three score years and ten,'* 7, and 
**God save the King,'* 8-10; it is 
not in the authorized yersion on its 
first issue in 16U« 10; nor in 
Shakespere, 11), '52-3. 

on M. Manavit's Life of 



Cardinal Mezzofanti, '54, 133-150. 
on the recent history of the 



Hungarian Language, '55, 286-310. 
on Dr. Eussell's life of 



Cardinal Mezzofanti, '59, 227-66. 
on the Anglo- Saxon termi- 



nation inff, 48-50, 83; on the 
probable future position of the 
English language, 207. 

Weaving or spinning, spiders named 
from, '59, 219. 

"Webster's Dictionary, 1830, notice of, 
'59, 269. 

"Wedgwood, H., on English etymolo- 
gies : awardy curtain f eutlaasy curtleax, 
cully f cozettf to gudgeon^ to wait^ 
8kait8f to sap, scarlet, sewer, shore, 
pinfold, pindar, pound, to muse, 
amuse, '50-2, 77-82. 

— ^-^^ on words fundamentally con- 
nected with the notion of contrac- 
tion, and formally referable to a 
root Krup or Kruk, '50-2, 127-31, 
143-47 ; and a list of 114 English 
words derived from this root, 147- 
48 ; on words formed from the roots 
smu and snu, imitative of sounds 
made by breathing or blowing 
through the nose, 166-167. 

on certain English etymolo- 



ies, '77-9, 663, viii. 

on miscellaneous etymologies, 



'73-4, 60, 328. 

on English etymologies, '48- 



50, 126, 247, 266. 

on English etymology, '46-8, 



149. 



notices of English etymology, 
'44-6, 1 ; on onomatopaia, 109 ; 
notices of English etymology, 177. 
on tne connection of the 



delectare, '60-1, 150 ; the family 
relationship between the Finnish ana 
Indo-Germanic languages main- 
tained, 281. 

Wedgwood, H., on the terminations of 
the numerals 1 1 and 12, and the equi- 
valent forms in Lithuanian, '57, 
29-32 ; on the derivation of the 
word broker, 117-19 ; on words de- 
scriptive of guttural action and the 
metaphors connected with them, 1 20- 
26. 

on the traces of an Egyptian 

origin in the alphabets of Greece and 
Kome, '50-2, 1-6 ; on English ety- 
mologies : to blear, to abie, to earn, 
earnest, to soar, a stave. Old Nick, 
risk, dock, to beg, to sound, to haunt, 
bug, bugbear, bogle, island, freeze, 
frizzle, frieze, to dade, causeway or 
causey, 31-9. 

on the use of shall and willf 



'52-3, 1-5; on English etymologies, 
87-91: ballast, 87; to box, 88; 
fetch-candle, feteh^ 88 ; gizzard, 
91 ; ^0 gnarl, snarl, 88 ; gorse, 91 ; 
haberdasher, 91; light, lift, 89; 
pageant, 90; to pout, 91; to rack 
off, 90 ; to give the sack, 90 ; to 
sew, sewer, 88 ; wharf, 89 ; wig, 
periwig, 87. 

on words admitting of being 



grouped round the root Flap or Flak 
'52-3, 143-52 (list of the one hun- 
dred and twelve English words so to 
be grouped, 162) ; will, on the 
meaning and use of, 1-6. 

Wedgwood : on words derived from 
the Latin capra as the name of 
a catapult or battering ram, '59, 
1-8 (E. capstan, crab, cable, 
eablish, caliv.r, carbine) ; on the 
phrase **trus and begone," 74-7; 
on derivation and meaning of the 
word carpet, 77-8; on coincidences 
between the Galla and different 
European languages, 78-82 ; on the 
words wig and periwig, 127-8 ; on 
words derived from the cries used 
in setting on of dogs, 128-34 ; 
Shakespere' s "That runaway eyes 
may wmk," 135-6. 

an examination of Kolben's 

(Kolb's) assertion that Hottentot 
was the native name of the race, 
'66, 11. 

Selections with amendments 



Latin dulcis with delieia, delicatus, 



from the second volume of his 
Dictionary of English Etymology, 
'62-3, 160. 



58 INDEX TO PROC. AND TRANS. PHILOLOG. SOC. 1842-79. 



Wedgwood, on the etymology of the 
word trap-rock, '42-4, 12. 

■ English etymologies (adaWf 

boulders, buxom, eharcoal, doit, 
forcemeat, fulsome^ gewgaw, go to 
pot, tadpole), '68-9, 288-295. 

English Etymologies, *68, 



1 ; Conicidences in the Roots of 
African and European languages, 
36. 

— English Etymologies, '66, 



6 ; Dictionary of English Etymolo- 
gies, notes on, and additions to, 187. 
on English Etymologies, 



'64, 73-83 ; {to bedizen, dizen, 73 ; 
muck, meek, 74 ; wort, 75 ; grease, 
76 ; stud, pong, 76 ; brush, 76 ; 
gossomer, 78 ; braces, breeches, 78 ; 
wise, guise, 79 ; less, 81) ; on the 
confusion of meaning between cor- 
vus and comix, 107-108 ; on the 
etymology of the word grant, 120- 
124 ; on the derivation of the word 
bait, 295-296. 

English Etymologies : 1, 



Figurative derivations from the 
notion of stammering ; 2. Witwal, 
Witiol ; 3. Gambison, ; 4. Hansel, 
Banse-Town, '60-1, 30-37; Ear- 
ridan ; Gat Toothed; Jack of Dover, 
Gala Goal; Fudge; To fix; Ferret, 
To run the Gauntlet, 145-150. 

on roots mutually connected 



by reference to the term zig-zag, '66, 
16-28 ; English Etymologies, 104- 
118 {abolish, 104; afraid, affray, 
frag, 106 ; allow, 106 ; aver, aver^ 
age, 108 ; barretor, bargain, 109 ; 
behave, behove, 111; beseem, beteem, 
112; bigot, 113-116; bloater, 116; 
boobg, 117 ; boor, bown or bound, 
husband, build, big, 117-118) ; on 
False etymologies, 62-72; on the 
meaning of the root gen or ken, 207- 

209. 

further observations on the 



connexion of the Finnish and Indo- 
Germanic classes of languages, '66, 
172-179 ; miscellaneous etymologies 
illustrated from the Finnish lan- 
guages, 179-189 {bore, burin, bur, 
180 ; auger, 181 ; turnip, 182 ; 
Kiaof, 183 ; nickname, 183 ; leisure, 
184 ; lie, 185 ; lack, 185 ; G. lind- 
wurm, 186 ; yniKtov, 186 ; L. murus, 
186 ; arbiter, 186 ; quis quilice, 187 
runcare, 189 ; oris, 188 ; ordure, 

189). 
Welsh, change of n into d in, '69, 

150. 



Welsh language, '78-4, 165. 

Welsh language. See Celtic languages. 

Welsh and Teutonic languages, on the 

connexion between, '67, 39-92. 
Welsh representatives of the prefix ova, 

'64, 41. 
Wer, Anglo-Saxon, '68, 71. 
Westergaard's work on the Sanscrit 

roots, '42-4, 33. 
Westminster Review, quoted, '62-8, 

115 sq. 
Weymouth, R. F., M.A., on Bishop 

Grosseteste's ** Castle of Love," 

'62-8, 48 ; on the letter r, 264. 
on here and there in Chaucer, 

'77-9, 1* 1. 

on who as a relative. 



'60-1, 64 ; on the phrase "diame- 
trically opposed," 197 ; on the 
Homeric epithets 6$pifios and $pia- 
poi, 250 ; notes on the Roxburghe 
Club's Morte Arthur, 279. 

statement of, on the use of 



/ — - — - 

who in the nominative as a relative 
before a.d. 1627, controverted, '66, 
139. 

four Devonian provincialisms, 

'64, 84. 

Wexford. Vid. Ireland. 

Wh, sounds of, '78-4, 322. 

Wheatley, Henry B., Esq., notes on 
English Heterographers, '66, 13 ; 
chronological notices of the diction- 
aries of me English language, 218 ; 
dictionary of reduplicated words in 
the English language, App. 

Whewell, W., an account of the lat6 
Cambridge Etymological Society 
and its plans, with some specimens 
of its labours, '60-2, 133-42. 

Whitmee, Rev. S. J., on our present 
knowledge of the languages of Poly- 
nesia, '77-9, 424. 

Whitney, Prof., on Peile's Greek and 
Latin Etymology, '73-4, 299. 

"Who" a£ a relative, '60-1, 64. 

in nominative used as a re- 
lative before 1 627, in reply to Mr. 
Weymouth, '66, 139. 

Wiclif, quoted, '62-3, 106. 

Wig ana periwig, the derivation of, 
'69, 127-8. 

Will, on the meaning and use of, 
'62-3, 1-5. 

Wilkins, Bishop, his use of then and 
than, '69, 152. 

Williams, Rev. R., a supplement to 
his *' Lexicon Comu-Britarmicus. * 
by Whitley Stokes, '68-9, 137- 
250. 



I. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 



59 



Willis, Prof., on vowel sounds, *62-3, 

131 sqq. 
Wilson, Alex., poems, quoted, '62-3, 

96. 
Wilson, Prof. H. H., cited, '62-3, 

125, 128. 
the term aapos as 

used in Babylonian chronology indi- 
cates merely a mythological period, 

'44-6, 87. 
■ a notice of the 

European grammars and lexicons of 

the Sanscrit language, '42-4, 13. 
Winer, on the New Testament use of 

Aia, controyerted, '65, 181. 
'Wisey Eng., '62-3, 96. 
With = eon f -with — eon 'tra, '67, 94. 
Woloff language, '56, 108, 110 sqq., 

122. 
Women, transmission of language by, 

'62-3, 259, n 1. 

education of, '73-4, 358. 

Woodlouse, on the names of the, '60-1, 

8. 
Woolwa vocabulary, '73-4, 360. 
" Word," the definition of, '55, 136. 
Word-building by addition of affixes, 

and by inflection or motion, on the 

alleged distinction between, '52-8, 

120-1. 
Word list, Teutonic, Old, Middle, and 

Modem English forms, '73-4, 542, 

611. 
— ^-^— similar in form, but radically 

distinct, 79. 



Word list which denote waterfowl and 
swimming, by Prof. T. H. Key, 
M.A., '62-3, 14. 

Wright, Mr. T., his opinion that there 
is no Scandinavian element in Eng- 
lish, refuted, '69, 18-30. 

Written and spoken languages, '62-3, 
132, 232. 

X =8 in Norman, '68-9, 420. 

Xerxes, his pedigree, '52-58, 18 ; lines 
of march of the divisions of his army 
before the Battle of Salamis, 112. 

Yates, James, on the irregularities in 
the versification of Homer, 119-142. 

remarks on English ortho- 
graphy, '42-4, 7 ; remarks on a 
statue of Endymion, illustrative of 
a passage in Lucian, 8. 

Ye or ie does rhyme with f/ and t in 
Chaucer, as well as earlier English 
and French jjoets, '68-9, 437-440. 

Yere, pronunciation of, in Chaucer, 
'77-79, 10*. 

"Young bones "= infants just bom, 
'60-ttl, 141. 

Zy final, interchanged with d, '68, 8. 

Z=* in Norman, '68-9, 421. 

Zulu language, '73-4, 189. 

Zulu words compared with European, 

'58, 37 sqq, 
ZupiTZA, Prof., on editors and editing, 

'77-9, 11. 



BTKPHKK ArSTXK AND BOMS, PRUTTEBS, HKBTFORD. 



ifWemoranlJttm 



AND 



9LvtitU^ of ajSJiSJortatiott 



OF 



THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY. 

(Registered 2nd January^ 1879*) 









&0 

d 






1 






. 1 

.5 


1 

1 
1 






•5 


an 

.2 










i 










-s 


§ 




-*» 






1 








# 






4S 


Q^ 




^ 






;w 






« 




a 


i 








oT 


■ 

•S 




• 


o 




1 


1 




d 






1 




W 1 

• 

1 


o 


iOCIETY 


Society (The w 


ncorporated under 




January, One The 




O 

o 


•5 








i^ 


UJ 


1 


M 




«« 










^ 


9 c: 




logical 


bis day 


• 


nd day o 








1 


^' ;• ;^2 


w 


IL*'^'^ 


I (^ 


s U 


o 


V»3 




CQ 








i 


diLl 


^^ 


^ ^ 

^ 


f 1 

o 
o 


the P 


Trade) 


• 
43 












"•^ 


h4 


^ 


C4H 


•1^ 


'H 










a 


,^^^^ 


rd 


O 




s 










»^^ 


o 


H 


n^ 




h[ 














HIL 




O 

o 


mpany is 


ly hand at 










• 








p-i 







o 
O 

OQ 


u 








• 

o 

• 




ct 


^ 




^ 
o 


g 


:S 


g 


d 

F 




o 

• 




• 

o 




A 


»Cv 






i 


d 




o 




^ 




V 


^ 


^ 




.5 


i 




• • 




















£ 




la 










1 






CQ 














1 


CO 
00 

1-^ 




"3 

3 







THE COMPAIOES ACTS, 1862 and 1867. 



COMPAITT LIMITED BY QtTAEANTEE. 



Sl^tmoxanhnm of ;^jB^0oeiation 



OP 



THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY, 



TO BE BEGISIEBED WITH ABIICLES OF ASSOCIATION, 



1. — The name of the Association is "The Philological 
Society." 

2. — ^The registered office of the Association will be situate 
in England. 

3. — The objects for which the Association is established are: 
To investigate and to promote the study and knowledge 
of the structure, the affinities, and the history of 
languages, and to apply all the profits (if any) or 
other income of the Association for the promotion of 
the above object, without payment of any dividend 
to the 'members of the Association. The doing all such 
other lawful things as are incidental or conducive to 
the attainment of the above objects. 
4. — The income and property of the Association, whence- 
soever derived, shall be applied solely towards the promotion 
of the objects of the Association as set forth in this Memo- 
randum of Association ; and no portion thereof shall be paid 
or transferred directly or indirectly, by way of dividend.. ' 
bonus, or otherwise howsoever by way of proflty tf 
persons who at any time are or have been membem 



4 HEMOBANDUM OF ASSOCIATION OF THE FHUOLOOICAL SOCIETT. 

Association, or to any of them, or to. any person claiming 
through any of them. 

Provided that nothing herein shall prevent the payment, 
in good faith, of remuneration to any officers or servants of 
the Association, or to any member of the Association, or 
other person, in return for any services actually rendered to 
the Association. 

5. — The fourth paragraph of this Memorandum is a con- 
dition on which a licence is granted by the Board of Trade 
to the Association in pursuance of section 23 of the Com- 
panies Act, 1867. For the purpose of preventing any 
evasion of the terms of the said fourth paragraph, the Board 
of Trade may from time to time, on the application of any 
member of the Association, impose further conditions, which 
shall be duly observed by the Association. 

6. — If the Association act in contravention of the fourth 
paragraph of this Memorandum, or of any such further 
conditions, the liability of every Member of Council of 
the Association shall be imlimited, and the liability of every 
member who has received any such dividend, bonus, or 
other profit as aforesaid, shall likewise be unlimited. 

7. — Every member of the Association undertakes to con- 
tribute to the assets of the Association, in the event of the 
same being wound up during the time that he is a member, 
or within one year afterwards, for payment of the debts 
and liabilities of the Association contracted before the time 
at which he ceases to be a member, and of the costs, charges, 
and expenses of winding up the same, and for the adjustment 
of the rights of the contributories amongst themselves, such 
amount as may be required not exceeding one pound, or in 
case of his liability becoming unlimited, such other amoimt 
as may be required in pursuance of the last preceding para- 
graph of this Memorandum. 

8. — If upon the winding up or dissolution of the Associa- 
tion there remains, after the satisfaction of all its debts and 



HEH0BAlO)TJM OF ASSOCIATIOK OF THE PHUOLOOICAL SOCIETT. 

liabilities, any property whatsoever, the same shall not be 
paid to or distributed among the members of the Association, 
but shall be given or transferred to some other institution or 
institutions, having objects similar to the objects of the 
Association, to be determined by the members of the Asso- 
ciation at or before the time of dissolution, or in default 
thereof by such Judge of the High Court of Justice as may 
have or acquire jurisdiction in the matter. 

We, the several persons whose names and addresses 
are subscribed, are desirous of being formed into an 
Association in pursuance of this Memorandum of 
Association. 

Karnes, Addresses, and Descriptions of Subscribers. 

James A.TJGUSTirs Henht Mijeeat, Mill Hill, N.W., JJ.A., Doctor 
of Laws. 

Henry Sweet, 140, Maida Yale, London, Master of Arts. 

Feedeelick James Ftjenivall, 3, St. George's Square, London, 
N.W., Barrister. 

Edwaed Ltall Beandeeth, 32, Elvaston Place, London, Barrister. 

Charles Pieeee Henri Eieu, 28, Wobum Square, Bloomsbury, 
Keeper of Oriental MSS., Biitisli Museum. 

John Newby Hetherington, 62, Harley Street, London, Teacher 
of English. 

Charles Bagot Catlet, 4, South Crescent, Bedford Square, 
London, Literary. 

Henry Kicol, 52, Thomhill Eoad, London, Gentleman, 
Dated the 20th day of December, 1878. 



"Witness to the above signatures : 

Charles Sweet, 140, Maida Yale, London, Solicitor. 



Zxtitlti of Z^&otiation 



OF 



THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY. 



1. — None of the regulations contained in the table marked 
A in the first Schedule to the Companies Act, 1862, shall be 
regulations of this Company. 

2, — The Society adopts and agrees to carry into effect the 
provisions of the Agreement of which a copy is contained 
in the Appendix to these Articles; and upon the proper 
entry being made in the register of members of the name 
and address and the occupation (if any) of any person who 
according to the terms of the said Agreement is to become 
an Ordinary or an Honorary Member of the Society, he 
shall become an Ordinary or an Honorary Member (as the 
case may be) accordingly, and these Articles shall apply to 
him with such modifications (if any) as may be necessary 
to carry the intention of the said Agreement into effect. 

Constitution. 

3. — The Society shall consist of a President, Vice- 
Presidents not exceeding seven in number, Ordinary 
Members unlimited in number, and Honorary Members 
not exceeding twenty-five in number, who shall be Foreign 
Scholars or British Scholars not resident in the XJnited 
Kingdom. 

Government. 

4. — The Government of the Society is vested in the 
Council, and the Council shall consist of the President, the 
Vice-Presidents, a Treasurer, one or two Honorary Secre- 
taries, and twenty Ordinary Members, 



ABTIOIXS OP ASSOCIATION OF THE PHILOLOGIGAr SOftBTT. 7 

The Members of the Council on the twentieth day of 
December, 1878, are : 

President. 
JAS. A. H. MUKRAY, ESQ., LL.D., B.A. 

Vice- Presidents, 

THE ARCHBISHOP OP DUBLIN. 
EDWIN GUEST, ESQ., M.A. 
WHITLEY STOKES, ESQ., LL.D., M.A. 
ALEXANDER JOHN ELLIS, ESQ., B.A., P.R.S. 
THE REV. RICHARD MORRIS, LL.D., M.A. 
HENRY SWEET, ESa, M.A. 

Treasurer. 
BENJAMIN DAWSON, ESQ., B.A., The Mount, Hampstead, London, N.W. 

Man. Secretary, 

FREDERICK JAMES FURNIVALL, ESQ., M.A., 3, St. George's Square. 

Primrose HiU, N.W. 

Ordinary Members of CouneUt 

E. I. BRANDRETH, ESQ. 

PROF. CHARLES CASSAL, LL.B. 

C. B. CAYLEY, ESQ., B.A. 

ROBERT NEEDHAM OUST, ESQ. 

SIR JOHN FRANCIS DAVIS, BART. 

FREDERIC THOMAS ELWORTHY, ESQ. 

HENRY HUCKS GIBBS, ESQ., M.A. 

E. R. HORTON, ESQ., M.A. 

HENRY JENNER, ESQ., M.A. 

RUSSELL MARTINEAU, ESQ., M.A. 

THE REV. PROFESSOR J. B. MAYOR, M.A- 

W. R. MORFILL, ESQ., M.A. 

SIR CHARLES A. MURRAY, K.C.B. 

HENRY NICOL, ESQ. 

PROFESSOR CHARLES RIEU, Ph.D. 

THE REV. PROFESSOR W. W. SKEAT, MA* 

THE REV. W. THOMPSON, D.D. 

PROFESSOR WILHELM WAGNER, Ph.D. 

HENSLEIGH WEDGWOOD, ESQ., M.A. 

R. F. WEYMOUTH, ESQ., D.Lit., M.A. 

The Cotmcil may appoint additional Sea 
duties, and may for specific objects connecti 
procure the assistance of persons not membo) 



8 ABIICLES OF ASSOCIATION OF THE PHILOLOGICAL SOdETT* 

Election of the Council. 

5. — At the Annual General Meeting, the President, Yiee- 
Presidents, Treasurer, Secretary or Secretaries, and Ordinary- 
Members of the Council, shall go out of office, and their 
successors shall be elected by open vote, unless a ballot be 
required by one-third of the members present, and all or 
any of the members of the Council for the past year may be 
re-elected for the ensuing year, except four of the Ordinary 
Members to be determined by the Council, regard being had, 
among other considerations, to the number of times they 
have attended the Council meetings. 

6, — If between two Annual Meetings a vacancy in the 
Council occurs, the Council may appoint a member of the 
Society to fill it. 

Admission of Ordinary Members. 

7. — A candidate for admission as an ordinary member of the 
Society must be proposed according to the form No, 1 in the 
Appendix, under the hands of three members, one of whom 
must certify his personal knowledge of the candidate, unless 
the Council in special cases dispense with this requirement. 

The proposal must be delivered to the Secretary, and read 
at an Ordinary Meeting of the Society; and at the first 
Ordinary Meeting after the proposal, if the Chairman de- 
clares that the candidate has obtained a majority of votes 
of the members then present, and the candidate within 
twenty-eight days thereafter (or within such further time as 
the Council for special cause may allow) subscribes the form 
No. 2 in the Appendix, and obtains the Treasurer's certificate 
that he has paid his entrance fee and his first year's contri- 
bution, he shall thereupon become a member of the Society. 
If one-third of the members present at the meeting so re- 
quire, the voting shall be by ballot 



JinTTCLES OF ASSOCIATION OF THE PHXLOLOGICAI. SOOETT, ^ 

Election of Honorary Members. 

8. — If a person is recommended to the Council for admission 
as an Honorary Member by tbree or more members, his 
claim stall be referred to a Committee for consideration. On 
their report, the Council may, if they see fit, recommend him 
to the Society as a proper person to be so admitted, where- 
upon he shall be proposed, and may be elected, in the same 
way as an ordinary member, save that a certificate of per- 
sonal knowledge shall not be necessary. 

An honorary member may not hold any office in the 
Society. 

9. — An honorary member, being a British subject, who 
becomes resident in the United Kingdom, shall thereupon 
cease to be an honorary member, but may become an ordi- 
nary member without a fresh election by signing the form 
and obtaining the certificate mentioned in Article 7. 

10. — An honorary member may become an ordinary mem- 
ber without being proposed or elected, by signing the form 
and obtaining the certificate mentioned in Article 7, 

Expulsion of Members. 

11. — Should the Cotmcil see cause for the expulsion from 
the Society of a member, they may call a Special General 
Meeting for that purpose ; and if upon a vote taken while 
not less than twenty-four members are present, the Chairman 
of the meeting shall declare that three-fourths of the votes 
given, are for the expulsion of the member, he shall there- 
upon cease to be a member. The voting shall be by ballot, 
if one-third of the members present desire it to be so. 

Contributions of Ordinary Members. 

12. — Each ordinary member shall on his election pay one 
guinea as an entrance fee, and one guinea for his first year's 
contribution^ and shall pay. an annual subscription of one 



Id ASnCLES OP ASSOCIATION OF THE PHILOLOOICAL SOCIETT. 

guinea on eaxjh foUowing first day of January for the year 
commencing with that day, until he has ceased to be a 
member. 

13. — No ordinary member shall be entitled to a copy of the 
Society's publications for any year tuitil he has paid the con- 
tribution for that year, and for every preceding year (if any) 
during which he was an ordinary member, and the fine (if 
any) in respect thereof. 

14.— If an ordinary member's contribution for any year 
is not paid before the next January, he shall not be 
entitled to a copy of the Society's publications for that year 
except by payment of a fine of five shillings in addition to 
the contribution. 

15. — On each 1st of May the Treasurer shall send to each 
member whose contribution is in arrear, notice that he will 
not be entitled to a copy of the Society's pubKcations for the 
current year, without payment of the fine, unless the con- 
tribution is paid before the ensuing 1st of January. 

16. — On each 1st of January the Treasurer shall send to 
each ordinary member whose contribution for the preceding 
year is unpaid, notice thereof, with a copy of the rules relating 
to the contributions of members, and if the arrear and the 
fine be not paid by the 1st of May following, the defaulter 
shall cease to be a member of the Society, and his exclusion 
shall be announced at the next Annual Meeting, and pub- 
lished in the next issued Address of the President of the 
Society or the Auditors' Report, but the defaulter may be 
re- admitted by the Council without re-election on payment 
of his arrears, with the fine of five shillings for each year in 
arrear, and thereupon he shall receive such of the Society's 
publications as he would have received if he had not been in 
arrear. 

17.-An ordinary member may, on his admission or sub- 
sequently, compound for his annual contributions for the 
remainder of his life by payment of ten guineas, all sums 



*.. ' ^^ - > : :'■' .'- ^-. --. ^ - -•« -• 

J ^ - . : - ■» ;- • - •■ - ... ..• , 



A.BTICLES OF ASSOCIiLTION OF THE PHILOLOeiClL SOCIETF. 11 

then due, whether for entrance-fee, arrears, or fines, being 
paid at the same time. 

18.— An ordinary member may resign his membership by 
notice in writing to the Treasurer, and payment of all con- 
tributions and fines (if any) then due. 

Meetings of the Council. 

19. — Before each meeting of the Society, a meeting of the 
Council shall be held at the appointed place, and at such time 
as the Council shall by general rule or otherwise direct ; but 
any three members of the Council may by letter to the 
Secretary require an extra Meeting of the Council to be 
called; and if the Meeting is not so called, any three members 
of the Council may call it. 

20.^-Notice of each meeting of the Council shall be sent by 
the Secretary to every member of the Council whose residence 
is known. 

21. — Three members shall be sufficient to constitute a 
meeting of the Council. 

22. — Every question before a meeting of the Coimcil shall 
be decided by open vote, unless a ballot is demanded by one- 
third of the members present. 

23. — The decision of any question in Council meeting shall, 
at the desire of any two members present, or of one member 
if only three are present, be deferred to the next meeting, 
but shall not be again adjourned unless a majority of the 
members present so decide. 

24.— Minutes of the proceedings of every Council meeting 
shall be taken by the Secretary, and afterwards fairly entered 
in the Minute Book, and the entry having been read over 
and allowed or corrected at the next Council meeting, shall 
be signed by the Chairman of that meeting. 

Ordinary Meetings of the Society. 
25. — At least fourteen ordinary meetings of the Society 



* • r • ' ' • 



• • • • 

« • • • 



«> • 



: • • • • 

• • • 









12 



▲sTDCLigi or ACBocxinosr of the phtiolo&icai. sociETr. 



sliall be held between each month of October and the next 
month of July, at such times and places as the Council shall 
by general rule or otherwise direct. 

26. — The business of an Ordinary Meeting shall commence 
at eight in the evening precisely, or at such other time as the 
Council may appoint ; and shall be (1) to read the minutes 
of the last Ordinary Meeting ; (2) to announce any donations 
that may have been made to the Society ; (3) to propose and 
vote for members; and (4) to read and discuss such com- 
munications relating to Philology, or other subjects concern- 
ing the Society (except as mentioned in Article 28), as have 
been approved by the CounciL 

27. — Every member may introduce a visitor at an Ordinary 
Meeting, with the consent of the meeting. 

28. — At an Ordinary Meeting, no resolution relating to the 
rules or management of the Society shall be proposed, except 
as provided by Article 36. 

Annual General Meetings. 

29. — ^The Annual General Meeting of the Members of the 
Society shall be held on the third Friday in May at eight in 
the evening, or on such other day, and at such other time as 
the Council shall appoint, to receive the Auditors' Report, to 
discuss and determine questions relating to the affairs of the 
Society, to elect Officers for the ensuing year, and to hear the 
President's Address, or other Paper authorized by the Cotmcil. 

Special General Meetings. 

30. — The Council shall call a Special General Meeting of 
the Society when it seems to them expedient, or upon a 
requisition signed by five members of the Society speci- 
fying, in the form of a resolution, the object for which the 
meeting is required. The meeting shall be called by notice 
specifying the time, the resolution proposed to be submitted 
to the meeting, and the names of the requisitionists (if any), 
which notioe shall be sent to all members residing in the 



ASnCLES OF ASSOCIATION OF THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY. 13 

United Kingdom, at least fourteen days before the meeting ; 
and the meeting shall not discuss any subject not specified 
in the notice. 

31. — At a General Meeting each member present shall 
have one vote. 

Chairman of a Meeting. 

32.: — ^At a meeting of the Society or of the Council, the 
Chair shall be taken by the President, or, in his absence, by 
one of the Vice-Presidents, or, if they also are absent, by one 
of the Members of the Council, or, if no Member of the 
Council be present, by a Member of the Society chosen by 
the Meeting. 

33. — The Chairman of a Meeting of the Council or of the 
Society shall decide all questions of order, and in case of an 
equality of votes (whether by ballot or otherwise), shall have 
a casting vote in addition to his original vote. 

Treasurer. 

34. — The Treasurer shall keep an accoimt of all moneys 
paid or owing to or by the Society, and shall receive or direct 
payment to the Society's bankers of all moneys payable to 
the Society, and shall give to every person who has paid his 
entrance- fee and first year's contribution, in addition to a 
receipt for the payment, a certificate of it, and shall pay into 
the Society's account at their Bankers all moneys received 
by him for the Society. 

35. — 1^0 payment on account of the Society to the amotmt ^ 
of £5 or upwards shall be made except upon order of the 
Council entered in the Council Meeting Minute Book, signed 
by the Chairman and registered by the Secretary. 

36. — The Treasurer's accounts shall be audited by two or 
more Auditors, chosen by the Society at one of the three 
Ordinary Meetings next before the Annual General Meeting, 
who shall prepare and lay before the Annual General Meeting 
a statement, under proper heads, of the receipts and expendi- 



14 ABl^ICLES OF ASSOOIATION 07 THE PHILOLOGICAI. SOdETT. 

ture during the year ending on the 31st of December, 
and a balance-sheet containing' a summary of the property 
and liabilities of the Society at the end of that year, and also 
a list of any members in arrear for sums due at the com- 
mencement of that year, with the amounts of the arrears. 

37. — The Treasurer may, with the approbation of the Coun- 
cil, appoint a proper person to collect the annual contributions 
of the members ; and such Collector shall, if required by the 
Council, give satisfactory security. The Treasurer shall keep 
a Register of the Members of the Society as required by the 
Companies Act, 1862, section 25, and a Register of the 
Members of the Council as required by the forty-fifth section 

of that Act. 

Secretakies, 

38. — If there are several Secretaries, they shall arrange 
which of them shaU for the time being perform the duties of 
Secretary, and the acting Secretary is herein referred to as 
" the Secretary." 

39. — The Secretary shall attend meetings of the Society 
and of the Council, take minutes of their proceedings, and 
cause the same to be properly entered in the minute-books. 

40. — At an Ordinary Meeting the Secretary shall read the 
minutes of the preceding meeting of the Society, give notice 
of any candidate proposed for admission or to be voted for, 
and read such of the letters and papers sent or presented 
to the Society as the Council shall direct to be read, but any 
paper may, with permission of the Council, be read by the 
author. 

41. — Subject to the control of the Cotmcil, the Secretary 
shall have the superintendence of all persons employed by the 
Society except the Collector, and shall conduct the Society's 
correspondence. 

42. — The Secretary shall have diarge, under the direction 
of the Council, of the printing and publishing of the Papers 
and Transactions of the Society. 



ASXICLES OF ASSOdlTION 07 THB PHILOLOGICAL SOdEIt. 15 

Alteration of the Bules. 

43. — ^The Eules of the Society may be altered by a special 
resolution as defined in the Companies Act, 1862, section 51. 

Property of the Society. 

44. — The Council may appoint members of the Society to 
act as Trustees of such property of the Society as cannot be 
conveniently vested in the Society itself, and may from time 
to time remove or discharge any Trustee, and supply any 
vacancy in the office, and decide on the mode of investing 
or dealing with the moneys and investments of the Society. 

45. — All the profits (if any) and other income of the 
Society shall be applied in promoting its objects, and no 
dividend, gift, division, or bonus in money, or other equiva- 
lent (except the papers or publications of the Society), shall 
be paid or made by the Society unto or among any of the 
members, 

Notices. 

46. — A notice required to be served on any Member or 
Officer of the Society for any purpose, may be served either 
personally, or by being left or sent through the post in a 
letter addressed to the Member at his registered address, or 
to the Officer, at the Society's registered office. 



Names, Addresses, and Descriptions of Subscribers. 

James Attqttstus Hewkt Mijheat, Mill Hill, N.W., Doctor of Laws. 

Henbt Sweet, 140, Maida Vale, London, Master of Arts. 

Feedekick James Puknivall, 3, St. George's Square, London, 
K.W., Barrister. 

Edward Ltall Beandreth, 32, Elvaston Place, London, Barrister. 



16 AKIICLES OF ASSOdATIOir OF THB FHIL0L06IGAL SOClCir. 

Chaeles Piebes Hexbi RiEUy 28, 'Wobum Sqnare, Bloomsbuiyy 
Keeper of Oriental MSS., British. Museum. 

John Newbt "KvrEJSBJSQXOis, 62, Harley Street, London, Teacher 
of English. 

Chables Bagot CATLEr, 4, South Crescent, Bedford Square, 
London, Literary. 

Hekby Nicol, 52, Thomhill Eoad, London. Grentleman. 
Dated the 20th day of December, 1878. 



Witness to the above signatures 



Chables Sweet, 140, Maida Yale, London, Solicitor. 



17 



APPEP^mx 'in THE ABOVE ARTICLES OF ASSOOTATIOK 

Form No. 1. 

A.B. [_Sere state the Christian name, surname, rank, profession, 
and usual place of resideyice of the candidate"] being desirous of 
admission into the Philological Society, we the undersigned propose 
and recommend him as a proper person to tecome a meraher 
thereof. 

Witness our hands this day of 18 
\_ prom per607MC hiowttdge.^ 



Form No. 2. 

I, the undersigned, having been elected a Member of the Philo- 
logical Society, do hereby promise that I will be governed by the 
Eules of the said Society, as they are now formed or as they may 
hereafter be altered or amended ; Provided, however, that whenever 
I shall signify in writing to the Society that I am desirous of with- 
drawing therefrom, I shall (after the payment of any annual con- 
tributions or fines which may be due by me at that period, and 
after giving up any books, papers, or other property belonging to 
the Society, in my possession or entrusted to me), be frfie from this 
obligation. 

"Witness mjr hand this day of 13 



IS 



COPY OF THE AGBEEltEST BEFEBEED TO IS THE 

ABTICLES. 

%U ^QffflllCllt iaa3£ <m the KftL dir <rf DeoPBober. 
1876y between James An^^ustcs Hrzuy Mhitsit. of MiH HHI, in 
thife Countr of Hiddlefiex, £»|^ LL.I>. ^Presiient ci ihe uDin- 
corporated Aasoei^on called *' Tlae Fidlolc'pefll SocietT " meedii^ 
at UniTersitT C<*lleg^. Lcfudon^ [whitli Swnetr is beremaft''. r 
referrtd to as "tbie A5&cKiad<Mi "% and Fredeiiek James Furaivall, 
Esq., Secretary of tbe Asociati<m, of Xo. 3. St. Geoi^'s Sqpare, 
Primrofie HilL in tbe CoimtT of Middlesex* tbat : — 

1. Upon tbe adoption and confiimation of tbis Agreement by 
leeolation of a Special General Keating of the Assc<ciation, tbe 
said Fredimck James FomiTall shall forthwith pi>ociixe tbe Memo- 
randum and Articles of Association of an intended Company to 
be called " The Philological Society " and hereinafter referred to 
as "the Society," the draft of which Memorandum and Artieles 
has been feigned in token of approval by the parties hereto, to be 
regiiitered with limited liability under the Companies Acts, 1862 
and 1867, provided the licence of the Board of Trade for tbe 
regiJftration of the Society with limited liability without tbe 
ad^lition of the word " limited " to its name can be obtained. 

2. Every person who is an ordinary member of the Association 
at the date of the registration of the Society, and who within 
one year thereafter subscribes the form Xo. 2 in the Appendix to 
tlie said Articles of Association, or any agreement to the same 
effect, shall thereupon become an ordinary member of the Society 
an from the said registration; and every person who is an 
Honorary Member of the Association at the said date shall there- 
upon become an Honorary Member of the Society as from the 
said registration; and the President and every other officer of 
the Association at the time of the said registration shall become 
an officer of the Society with the like title, powers, and duties 
in the Society as he previously had in the Association; and 
ail the moneys, investments, manuscripts, books, and other pro- 



19 

perty of the Association shall become the absolute property of the 
Society for the purposes thereof, and shall be transferred accord- 
ingly to the Society or to the Trustees thereof, as the Council of 
the Society shall direct. 

3. On and from the registration of the Society, the proceedings 
of the Association shall be taken up and continued by the Society 
instead of by the Association, and the annual contributions which 
would otherwise have been payable to the Association by the 
ordinary members thereof, shall thenceforth be paid by the said 
ordinary members to the Society according to the terms of the 
said Articles of Association, and all contributions and fines then 
owing by any of the members of the Association shall become due 
and be paid to the' Society as parts of its funds ; but no member of 
the Association who becomes a member of the Society shall be 
entitled to receive a copy of any of the Transactions and Publica- 
tions either of the Association or of the Society until he has so paid 
all contributions and fines (if any) so owing by him to the Associa- 
tion, or for the time being owing by him to the Society. 

4. All the debts, engagements, and liabilities of the Association 
shall be undertaken, paid, and discharged by the Society ; and the 
printing and publication, or distribution of the Transactions of the 
Association, and of Papers communicated to the Association, shall 
be carried on and completed by the Society under the direction of 
the Council thereof. 

The expenses of and incident to the preparation, execution, and 
carrying into effect of this Agreement, shall be paid out of the 
funds of the Association. 

As witness the hands of the said parties 

JAMES A. H. MURRAY, 
niEDK. J. FURJS^IYALL. 



iKlemoratttittm 



AND 



articles of assoctatton 



OF 



THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY. 



{Registered 2nd January^ 1879.) 



PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY. 

(MEETING AT UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, LONDON, W.O.) 

1884. 



COUNCIL, 1884-5. 

President, 
THE EEV. PROF. W. W. SKEAT, LL.D., M.A. 

Viee-Fresidents, 

THE ARCHBISHOP OF DUBLIN. 

WHITLEY STOKES, LL.D., M.A. 

A. J. ELLIS, B.A., F.R.S. 

THE REV. RICHARD MORRIS, LL.D., M.A. 

HENRY SWEET, M.A. 

JAMES A. H. MURRAY, LL.D., B.A. 

PRINCE LOUIS-LUCIEN BONAPARTE. 

Ordinary Members of Council. 



Prop. ALEX. GRAHAM BELL, M.A. 
HENRY BRADSHAW, M.A. 

E. L. BRANDRETH, ESQ. 
PROF. C. CASSAL, LL.D. 
R. N. OUST, ESQ. 

SIR JN. F. DAVIS, BART. 

F. T. ELWORTHY, ESQ. 
HY. HUCKS GIBBS, M.A. 
H. JENNER, ESQ. 

E. L. LUSHINGTON, LL.D. 



PROF. R. MARTINEAU, M.A. 

A. J. PATTERSON, M.A. 

J. PEILE, M.A. 

PROF. J. P. POSTGATE, M.A. 

PROF. C. RIEU, Ph.D. 

The rev. A. H. SAYCE, M.A. 

E. B. TYLOR, LL.D., Ph.D, 

H. WEDGWOOD, M.A. 

R. F. WEYMOUTH, D.Lit. 



Treasurer. 
BENJAMIN DAWSON, B.A., The Mount, Hampstead, London, N.W. 

Son. Secretary. 
F. J. FURNIVALL, M.A., 3, St. George's Square, Primrose Hill, N.W. 

Bankers. 
Messrs. RANSOM, BOUVERIE & Co., 1, PaU Mall East, S.W. 



Entrance Fee £1 Is. ; Subscription, £1 Is. a Year (due every Ut of January), 

OR £10 10«. FOR life. 



Publishers of the Transactions. 
TRUBNER & Co., 57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, £.C. 



MEMBERS OF THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY, 1884. 

I 

{Corrected to October 6, 1884.) 



HONORARY MEMBERS. 



Signer Bernardino Biondklli. Milan. 

Author of " Saggio siii Dialetti Qallo-Italici^^ etc. 
Professor Henri Gaidoz. Eeole des Hautes Etudes, 22, Rue 

Servandoni, Paris. Editor of the ^^ Revue Celtiqm,^' etc. 
Professor Kern. Leiden. 
Professor Johan N. Madvig. University, Copenhagen. 

Author of the " Latinsk Sproglcere^^ etc. 
Professor F. A. March. Lafayette College, Easton, Pa., U.S.A. 

Author of "-4 Comparative Grammar of Anglo-Saxon.^' 
Professor Matzner. Berlin. 

Author of the " Englische Orammatiky 
Professor Paul Meyer. Ecole des Chartes, Paris. 

Editor of Flamenca^ etc. 
Professor W.Dwight Whitney. Tale Coll., Newhaven, U.S.A. 

Author of ^'Language and the Study of Language,'' etc. 



ORDINARY MEMBERS. 

* COMPOUNDERS FOR LIFE. 

1853. Dr. Altschul. 9, Old Bond Street, W. 

1879. *J. B. Andrews, Esq. Le Pigaute, Menton, Alpes M. 
1847. Dr. Ernest Adams. Hentley House, Hentley, War- 
rington. 

1883. Alfred D. G. Barriball, Esq. North Hill Villa, 
Brodrick Road, Upper Tooting, S.W. 

1881. *The Rev. A. L. Becker. Adrian Yilla, St. John's 
Road, Croydon, S.W. 

1880. The Rev. Henry Belcher. 63, Warwick Road 

Maida Hill, W. 



3 

1870. Alexander Graham Bell, Esq. Office of the Na- 

tional Telephone Co., 95, Milk Street, Boston, Mass. 
1869. George Bell, Esq. York Street, Covent Garden, 

W.C. 
1856. J. P. Bidlake, Esq. 

1869. *Demetriu8 Bikelas, Esq. 4, Rue de Babylone, Paris. 
1842. The Very Rev. Dean Blakesley, D.D. Deanery, 

Lincoln. 

1883. *H.I.H. Prince Louis-Lucien Bonaparte. 6, Norfolk 

Terrace, Bayswater, W. 
1880. The Rev. G. B. R. Bousfield. 5, Clifton Gardens, 
Maida Yale, W. 

1884. Dr. Wm. Brackebusch. The High School for Boys, 

Finchley Road, N.W. 
1863. Henry Bradshaw, Esq. King's College, Cambridge. 
1872. E. L. Brandreth, Esq. 32, Elvaston Place, S.W. 

1878. Theodore P. Brocklbhurst, Esq. Roundhey Park 

School, Leeds. 
1884. E. G. Brovtne, Esq. Stout's Hill, TJley, Dursley, 

Grlouces ters h ire 

1854. Sir Edward M. Buller. Old Palace Yard, S.W. 

1880. Cambridge Philological Society. 

1880. *Canterbury College, New Zealand. (Books to 

E. Stanford. 55, Charing Cross, W.C.) 
1860. Prof. Cassal. 105, Adelaide Road, N.W. 
1875. F. Chance, Esq. Burleigh House, Sydenham Hill, 

S.E. 

1871. Richard S. Charnock, Esq. Tetbury House, New 

Thornton Heath, Surrey. (Books to Junior Q-arrick 
Club, Adelphi Terrace, W.C.) 
1880. Arthur C. Cherry, Esq. 5, New Square, Lincoln's 
Inn, W.C. 

1879. *Hyde Clarke, Esq. St. George's Square, S.W. 
1844. Sir Edward Colebrooke, Bart., M.P. 14, South 

Street, Park Lane, W. 
1867. Miss Louisa B. Courtenay. 34, Brompton Square, 
S.W. 

1880. W. J. E. Crane, Esq. 

1872. Robert N. Ccjst, Esq. 64, St. George's Square, S.W. 

1842. Sir John F. Davis, Bart. AthenaBum Club ; and 

Hollywood, Henbury, Bristol. 
1867. Benjamin Dawson, Esq. The Mount, Hampstead, 

N.W. {Treasurer). 



1844. F. H. Dickinson, Esq. 121, St. George's Square, 

S.W. ; and Kingweston, Somerton. 
1860. *The Rev. Prof. A. J. D. D'Orsey. 13, Princes 

Square, Kensington Gardens, W. 
1879. E. Drielsma, Esq. 18, Castellain Road, Maida 

fliU, W. 

1866. *Alex. J. Ellis, Esq. 25, Argyll Road, Kensing- 
ton, W. 

1864. Alfred Elwes, Esq. 6, Coleman Street, E.G. 

1876. Fred. T. Elworthy, Esq. Foxdown, Wellington, 

Somersetshire. 

1865. *Talfourd Ely, Esq. University College, London, 

W.C. 

1842. The Rev. William Farrer. Oakleigh, Arkwright 

Road, Hampstead, N.W. 
1875. C. A. M. Fennell, Esq. Trumpington, Cambridge. 

1877. A. M. Ferguson, Esq. jim. Abbotsford, Lindula, 

Ceylon. 
1877. *Donald W. Ferguson, Esq. Observer OflBce, Colombo. 

(Books to Messrs. Triibner & Co., 57 and 59, 

Ludgate Hill, E.G.) 
1872. Gaston Philip Foa, Esq. 175, Camden Road, N.W. 
1869. *D. A. Freeman, Esq. 

1842. Danby P. Fry, Esq. 138, Haverstock Hill, N.W. 
1877. Major Fryer. India (Books to H. S. King & Co., 

Cornhill). 
1847. *F. J. FuRNiVALL, Esq. 3, St. George's Square, 

Primrose Hill, N^W. (Hon. Sec.) 

1865. ♦Colonel Gibbs. Junior Carlton Club, PaU MaU, S. W. 

1859. ♦H. Hucks Gibbs, Esq. St. Dunstan's, Regent's Park, 
N.W. 

1879. Dr. J. Hall Gladstone. 17, Pembridge Square, 
Bavswater, W. 

1862. Dr. Clair J. Grece. Red Hill, Surrey. 

1842. Prof. J. G. Greenwood, President of Owens 
College, Manchester. 

1869. The Rev. Walter Gregor« Pitsligo Manse, Fraser- 
burgh, Aberdeenshire. 

1882. MissHAiG. Blair Hill, Stirling. 
1868. Prof. John W. Hales. 1, Oppidans Road, Primrose 
Hill, N.W. 



1862. *Sir Reginald Hanson. 4, Bryanston Square, W. 

1879. *Prof. J. M. Hart. Mount Auburn, Cincinnati, 

U.S.A. 

1880. *Dr. H. R. Helwich. 29, Neugasse, OberdobL'ng, 

Vienna. 

1881. T. Henderson, Esq. Bedford County School, 

Bedford. 
1849, The Right Rev. Lord A. C. Hervey, Lord Bishop 
of Bath and Wells. The Palace, Wells, Somerset- 
shire. 

1874. J. H. Hessels, Esq. 2, Brunswick Walk, Cam- 

bridge. 

1868. J. N. Hetherington, Esq. 64, Harley Street, 

Cavendish Square, W. 
1854. *John Power Hicks, Esq. Clifton Lodge, Blomfield 

Road, Maida Hill, W. 
1864. *Shadworth H. Hodgson, Esq. 45, Conduit Street, 

Regent Street, W. 

1875. C. R. Hodgson, Esq. 42, Queen Square, W.C. 
1880. Dr. K. J. R. Hoerning. British Museum, W.C. 

185-. Martin H. Irving, Esq. Australia. (Books to Prof, 
S. R. Q-ardiner, South View, Widmore Road, 
Bromley, Kent.) 

1875. H. Jefferson, Esq. Valley View, Taunton. 
1880. H. I. Jenkinson, Esq. Keswick, Cumberland. 
1871. H. Jenner, Esq. British Museum, W.C. 

1878. C. S. Jerram, Esq. Windlesham, Famborough 

Station. 
1870. Q-eorge Joachim, Esq. 1, Great Winchester Street, 

E.C. 

1874. General Sir Arnold B. Kemball, C.B., K.C.S.I. 
79, Queen's Gate, W. 

1876. E. Kern, Esq 13, Rue G^rando, Paris. 

1882. R. N. Kerr, Esq. King Street Institution, Dundee. 

1884. R. Laishley, jun., Esq. Auckland, New Zealand. 
(Books, etc., care of G. Berry, Esq., 9, St. Mary- 
at-Hill, Eastcheap, E.C.) 

1869. *The Hon. and Rev. Stephen Willoughby Lawley. 

Spurfield, Exminster, Exeter. 
1884. James Lecky, Esq. 5, Alexandra Road, Wimbledon 
Surrey. 



1867. H. C. Levander, Esq. 30, North Villas, Camden 

Square, N.W. 
1871. *The Rev. S. S. Lewis. Corpus Christi College, 

Cambridge. 
1862. *D. Logan, Esq. 
1884. EiCHARD LovETT, Esq. 36, The Chase, Clapham 

Common, S.W. 
1856. The Rev. A. Lowy. 100, Sutherland Gardens, W. 
1842. *E. L. LusHiNGTON, Esq. Park House, Maidstone. 

1883. *The Rev. A. MacDiarmid. The Manse, Grantown- 

on-Skey, Scotland. 

1865. The Rev. Dr. Alex. Maclennan. Brompton Vicarage, 

Northallerton. 

1867. Prof. Russell Martineau. 5, Eldon Road, Hamp- 

stead, N.W. 
1842. C. P. Mason, Esq. Dukesell, Christchurch Road, 

Streatham Hill, S.W. 
1873. The Rev, J. B. Mayor. 

1873. Arthur W. K. Miller, Esq. British Museum, W.C. 

1884. *F. D. MocATTA, Esq. 9, Connaught Place, W. 
1854. *Lord Robert Montagu. Carlton Club, and 6, Clifton 

Gardens, Folkestone. 

1874. *W. R. Morfill, Esq. 4, Clarendon Villas, Park 

Town, Oxford. 
1862. The Rev. Dr. R. Morris. Lordship Lodge, Wood 
Green, N. 

1871. Sir Charles Murray. The Grange, Old VTindsor. 

1868. Dr. James A. H. Murray. Sunnyside, Mill Hill, 

N.VT. {Editor of the Society* 8 Dictionary,) 

1872. Miss Nesbitt. Rosslyn Park Gardens, Bath. 
1858. J. M. Norman, Esq. Dencombe, Crawley, Sussex. 

1881. T. L. Kington Oliphant, Esq. Combe House, 

Canterbury. 
1874. Owens College, Manchester. 

1858. Cornelius Paine, Esq. 9, Lewes Crescent, Kemp 
Town, Brighton. 

1873. A. J. Patterson, Esq. Savile Club, 107, Piccadilly, 

London, W. 

1866. J. Peile, Esq. Christ's College, Cambridge. 
1865. Sir J. A. Picton. 11, Dale Street, Liverpool. 
1880. *Prof. J. P. PosTGATE. Trinity College, Cambridge. 



1883. The Rev. Frederick W. Ragg. Masworth Vicarage, 

Tring. 
1876. W. R. S. Ralston, Esq. 8, Alfred Place, Bedford 
Square, W.C. 

1882. *William Ridgeway, Esq. Gonville and Caius 

College, Cambridge. 
1869. Prof. Charles Rieu. British Museum, W.C. 

1879. *The Rev. A. H. Sayce. Queen's College, Oxford. 

1879. Q-. A. ScHRUMPF, Esq. Tettenhall College, near 

Wolverhampton. 
1842. *The Rev. Robert Scott, D.D., Dean of Rochester. 

1884. J. Q-. E. SiBBALD, Esq. Accountant-General's De- 

partment, Spring Gardens, S.W. 
1863. *The Rev. Prof. Skeat. 2, Salisbury Villas, Cam- 
bridge (President). 

1880. *Eustace S. Smith, Esq. Bonner Road, Victoria Park, 

E. 

1871. *T. B. Sprague. Esq. 26, St. Andrew's Square, 
Edinburgh. 

1873. William Spurrell, Esq. 37, King Street, Car- 
marthen. 

1879. Thomas Stenhouse, Esq. 14, Lyndhurst Road, 
Hampstead, N.W. 

1881. Dr. Fred. Stock. Mill Hill Grammar School, 

N.W. 
1858. The Hon. Whitley Stokes, LL.D. 15, Grenville 

Place, South Kensington, S.W. 
1869. *Henry Sweet, Esq. Mansfield Cottage, Heath 

Street, Hampstead, N,W. {Editor of Monthly 

Abstracts.) 
1873. The Rev. W. Somerville Lach Szyrma. Penzance. 

1883. Captain R. C. Temple, India. (Books to H. S. 

King & Co., Comhill.) 
1875. *Jolin Thirlwall, Esq. 59, Pulteney Street, Bath. 
1842. *The Rev. W. H. Thompson, D.D., Master of Trinity 

College, Cambridge. 
1881. Henry Walter Thomson, Esq. Newstead, Forest 

Hill, S.E. 
1866. Samuel Timmins, Esq. Hill Cottage, Fillongley, 

Coventry. 
1857. The Most Rev. R. C. Trench, D.D., Aidb 

Dublin. Palace, Dublin. 



8 

1871. E. B. Tylor, Esq. The Museum House, Oxford. 

1878. The Rev. William TJrwick. 49, Belsize Park 

Gardens, Hampstead, N.W. 

1864. *E. YiLES, Esq. Codsall House, near Wolver- 
hampton. 

1879. F. J. ViPAN, Esq. 31, Bedford Place, London, W.C. 

1873. M. J. Walhouse, Esq. 9, Randolph Crescent, Maida 

Vale W« 
1875. C. H. Wall, Esq. 

1880. Richard Ware, Esq. Heath Street, Hampstead, 

N.W.^ 
1842. Hensleigh Wedgwood, Esq. 31, Queen Ann Street, 

W. 
1884. W. H. Wells, Esq. 91, Dearborn Street, Chicago, 

U.S.A. 
1882. Dr. F. J. Wershoven. Brieg, bei Breslau. 
1851. *Dr. R. F. Weymouth. Mill Hill Grammar School, 

N.W. 
1863. Henry B. Whbatley, Esq. 12, Caroline Street, 

Bedford Square, W.C. 
1882. *Thomas Wilson, Esq. Rivers Lodge, Harpenden, 

St. Albans, Herts. 
1880. Joseph P. Wright, Esq. Scarcroft Road, York. 
1870. Nicholas Wilcox Wyer, Esq. 3, Matford Terrace, St. 

Leonard's, Exeter. 



Bankers : Messrs. Ransom, Boxjverie, and Co., 1, Pall Mall 
East, S.W. 

Publishers of the IVansactions : Messrs. Trubner & Co., 
57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London. 



«*»•»«„,. 



Stanford University Library 

Stanford, California 

In order that others may use this book, ■ 
please return it as soon as possible, but 
not later than the date due.
Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Transactions of the Philological Society"

See other formats
